DVR-940HX-S
DVR-545HX-S
DVD RECORDER
®
®
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at www.pioneer.co.uk
(www.pioneer-eur.com)
Operating Instructions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Environment
CAUTION
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
(for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
warranty period.
K041_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
POWER-CORD CAUTION
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En
on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug
must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of
safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING : THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green & Yellow : Earth Blue : Neutral
Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or
by the earth symbol
or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
D3-4-2-1-2-1_B_En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05 Using the GUIDE Plus+®
electronic program guide
Contents
01 Before you start
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Putting the batteries in the remote
®
The GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . . . . . . 44
®
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . 45
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
®
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Using the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Disc / content format playback
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About the internal/external hard disk
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
06 Using the digital electronic
program guide
The Digital EPG system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using the Digital EPG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting timer programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Other useful EPG functions . . . . . . . . . . 64
02 Connecting up
Rear panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting a TV antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using other types of audio/video output . 18
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
07 Recording
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . 68
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners . 69
Setting the picture quality/recording
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . 21
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . 22
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . 23
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting the optional external HDD
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . 73
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Simultaneous recording and playback
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Recording from an external component . 78
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . 80
(DVR-940HX-S only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
08 Playback
03 Controls and displays
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the
contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . 88
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . 91
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . 91
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Displaying disc information on-screen . . 93
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Remote control (DVR-940HX-S) . . . . . . . . 31
Remote control (DVR-545HX-S) . . . . . . . . 33
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 36
For users receiving digital broadcast
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system . . 40
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09 Playing and recording from a DV
camcorder
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 94
Recording from a DV camcorder. . . . . . . 94
DV video setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
About DV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
16 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 137
Selecting other languages for language
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Using Software Update (Digital tuner) . 152
17 Additional information
Setting up the remote to control your TV
(DVR-940HX-S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
On-screen displays and recorder
displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 165
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
10 Editing
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 98
11 Copying and backup
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Copying between internal and external
HDDs (DVR-940HX-S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Using disc backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
12 Using the Jukebox
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 119
Copying files from a USB device . . . . . . 120
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . 120
Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13 The PhotoViewer
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . 122
Playing a slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Importing files to the HDD. . . . . . . . . . . 124
Importing files from a USB device . . . . . 125
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . 126
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
14 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Finalize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
15 The Video Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Before you start
CBhaepfteor 1re you start
What’s in the box
Important
Incorrect use of batteries can result in
hazards such as leakage and bursting.
Please observe the following:
Please confirm that the following
accessories are in the box when you open it.
• Remote control
• Don’t mix new and old batteries
together.
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries
together—although they may look
similar, different batteries may have
different voltages.
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)
• G-LINK™ cable
• RF antenna cable x 2 (1.5 m and 30 cm)
• Power cable
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends
of each battery match the indications in
the battery compartment.
• These operating instructions
• Warranty card
• Remove batteries from equipment that
isn’t going to be used for a month or
more.
• When disposing of used batteries,
please comply with governmental
regulations or environmental public
instruction’s rules that apply in your
country or area.
Putting the batteries in the
remote control
•
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the
battery compartment following the
indications (ꢀ,ꢁ) inside the
compartment.
WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
• DVR-940HX-S:
• DVR-545HX-S:
life or performance of batteries.
D3-4-2-3-3_En
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
Using the remote control
Disc / content format
playback compatibility
Please keep in mind the following when
using the remote control:
Compatible media
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 /
2x to 4x / 2x to 6x
• Make sure that there are no obstacles
between the remote and the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1x / 1x to 4x /
1x to 8x / 1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x
to 16x
• Remote operation may become
unreliable if strong sunlight or
fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x
• Remote controllers for different devices
can interfere with each other. Avoid
using remotes for other equipment
located close to this unit.
• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x
to 16x
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to
3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x
• Replace the batteries when you notice a
fall off in the operating range of the
remote.
• When the batteries run down or you
change the batteries, the remote control
mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote
Control Mode on page 149.
• Use within the operating range in front of
the remote control sensor on the front
panel, as shown.
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x
Note that older models of DVD recorders
and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2
discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If
you want to share DVD-RW discs between
this recorder and an older recorder/writer,
we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD
recorders’ limited compatibility with DVD-
RW ver. 1.2 discs.
Model
Playable
Yes1,2,3
Yes1
Recordable
7 m
DVR-7000
No
• You can control this recorder using the
remote sensor of another Pioneer
component using the CONTROL IN jack
on the rear panel. See Rear panel
connections on page 14 for more
information.
DVR-3100 /
DVR-5100H
No
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before
playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs
may not play.
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in
the display when you load a disc. However, this will not
affect playback.
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Before you start
DVD/HDD Recording and playback compatibility
This recorder can play and record all the currently popular DVD disc types, as well as
providing HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences
between the different disc types.
DVD
+RW
DVD-
RAM
HDD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
DVD+R
Marks used in this
manual
HDD
DVD (VR)
*1
DVD (Video)
DVD (VR)
*1
DVD (Video)
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
*2
*13, 16
Logos
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
*3
*3
ꢀ
ꢀ
*3
ꢀ *14
ꢀ
Re-recordable /
Erasable
ꢀ
ꢀ *4
ꢀ
ꢀ *4
ꢀ *4
ꢀ *4
ꢀ
Editing of recorded
programs
ꢀ *12
ꢀ *12
ꢀ *12
Recording of Copy-
once protected
material
n/a
*5
ꢀ *6
*7
ꢀ *6
ꢀ
*6, 15
ꢀ *8
ꢀ *9
Playback in other
players/recorders
ꢀ
ꢀ
Chase play
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
16:9 and 4:3 pro-
gram recording
ꢀ
*10, 11
ꢀ *11
ꢀ *11
ꢀ *11
Bilingual broad-
cast recording of
both audio chan-
nels
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only
Notes to table
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only
Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work
reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may
become unusable when recorded or edited.
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available
recording time, nor increase the number of recordable
titles left.
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized
before it can be recorded (page 131). In this case,
initialization will take about 1 hour.
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 131)
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording
(page 131)
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist
editing
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R(VR) playback
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in
some units) (page 79)
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW(VR) playback
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off (page 146)
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
8
En
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a
DualDisc, the opposite side to that being
played will be scratched. Scratched discs
may not be playable.
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL
(Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable
layers on a single side, giving about 1.8
times the recording capacity of a
conventional single-layer disc. This unit can
record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL
discs.
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this
product. DVD-Audio content will not play.
For more detailed information on the
DualDisc specification, please refer to the
disc manufacturer or disc retailer.
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video
mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on
this unit on other DVD recorders/players,
you must finalize them. (Note that some
DVD recorders/players may not play
even finalized DL discs.)
• Please read the information provided on
the disc packaging carefully before
purchasing DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs:
• Confirm the disc version: Use ver. 3.0 /
2x to 4x DVD-R discs.
• Confirm the recording speed: DVD-R
should be compatible with 2x or 4x
recording; DVD+R with 2.4x to 8x
recording.
Other disc compatibility
In addition to DVD, this recorder is
compatible with a wide range of disc types
(media) and formats. Playable discs will
generally feature one of the following logos
on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note
however that some disc types, such as
recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an
unplayable format—see below for further
compatibility information.
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
• This logo indicates that the disc is a
DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc:
Video CD
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
CD-R/-RW compatibility
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW
discs.
• Correct operation has been confirmed
for DVD-R DL discs (ver. 3.0 / 2x, 4x)
produced by the following
manufacturers: Mitsubishi Kagaku
Media, Verbatim (as of March 2005).
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/
Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM*
containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX
files.
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD
physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1.
Romeo and Joliet file systems are both
compatible with this recorder.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-
Audio and Video CD/Super VCD)
About DualDisc playback
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side
of which contains DVD content –video,
audio, etc. –while the other side contains
non-DVD content such as digital audio
material.
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio
only
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not
compliant with the CD Audio specification
and therefore may not play.
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Before you start
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media
Audio and refers to an audio compression
technology developed by Microsoft
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R,
CD-RW, USB.
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio
(WMA)
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or
48 kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher
recommended)
Corporation. WMA content can be encoded
®
by using Windows Media Player for
®
®
Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or
®
Windows Media Player 10 series.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback:
Yes
DivX video compatibility
• VBR WMA playback: No
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows
Media Codec 8 (files encoded using
Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable
but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,
Voice and VBR)
DivX is a compressed digital video format
created by the DivX video codec from DivX,
®
1
Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files
burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping
the same terminology as DVD-Video,
individual DivX video files are called "Titles."
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc
prior to burning, keep in mind that by default
they will be played in alphabetical order.
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file
playback: No
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must
be used for the recorder to recognize
MP3 and WMA files – do not use for
other file types)
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files
(if these limits are exceeded, only files
and folders up to these limits are
playable)
®
• Official DivX Certified product.
®
• Plays all versions of DivX video
®
(including DivX 6) with standard
®
playback of DivX media files.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
compatibility
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these
must be used for the recorder to
recognize DivX video files). Note that all
files with the .avi extension are recognized
as MPEG4, but not all of these are
necessarily DivX video files and therefore
may not be playable on this recorder.
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999
files.
®
The Windows Media logo printed on the
box indicates that this recorder can playback
Windows Media Audio content.
Note
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment)
used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your
PC and/or software.
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and
EXIF 2.2* still image files
*File format used by digital still cameras
®
DivX VOD content
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif
(must be used for the recorder to
recognize JPEG files – do not use for
other file types)
• File structure: The recorder can load up
to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if
there are more files/folders that this on
the disc then more can be reloaded)
DivX
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this recorder, you first need to
register the recorder with your DivX VOD
content provider. You do this by generating a
DivX VOD registration code, which you
submit to your provider.
Some DivX VOD content may only be
playable a fixed number of times. When you
load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD
content, the remaining number of plays is
shown on-screen and you then have the
option of playing the disc (thereby using up
one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If
you load a disc that contains expired DivX
VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), the message Rental
Expired is displayed.
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer
may not be playable in this unit due to the
setting of the application software used to
create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher
for more detailed information.
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited
number of plays, then you may load the disc
into your recorder and play the content as
often as you like, and no message will be
displayed.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF
format) are not compatible with this
recorder.
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW
software disc boxes for additional
compatibility information.
Important
Dolby Digital
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM
(Digital Rights Management) system.
This restricts playback of content to
specific, registered devices.
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD
content not authorized for this recorder,
the message Authorization Error is
displayed and the content will not play.
• Resetting the recorder (as described in
Resetting the recorder on page 167) will
not cause you to lose your registration
code.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Before you start
Please use the recorder following the
guidelines below to protect against possible
HDD failure.
DTS
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to
store recordings permanently. We
recommend that you back up your important
recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect
against accidental loss.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
DVB
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances
accept responsibility for any direct or indirect
loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of
recorded material resulting from HDD failure.
The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or
DVB for short, is a set of open standards for
digital broadcasting, covering terrestrial,
cable and satellite broadcasts.
• Do not move the recorder while it is on
(this includes during EPG download
when the display shows EPG).
• Install and use the recorder on a stable,
level surface.
Based around the MPEG-2 coding system,
these open standards ensure that compliant
systems are able to work together,
independent of manufacturer.
DVB is extremely flexible, being able to
deliver virtually any kind of digital content to
the home, including High Definition and
Standard Definition TV, broadband
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
• Do not use the recorder in excessively
hot or humid places, or in places that
may be subject to sudden changes in
temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to
form inside the recorder. This can be a
cause of HDD failure.
multimedia content and interactive services.
DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project.
• While the recorder is switched on
(including during EPG download when
the display shows EPG), do not unplug
from the wall socket or switch the
electricity off from the breaker switch.
• Do not move the recorder immediately
after switching it off. If you need to move
the recorder, please follow the steps
below:
About the internal/external
hard disk drive
The hard disk drive (internal or external
HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment.
Depending on the conditions under which it
is used, or through careless use, it is
possible that the recorded contents will be
damaged or lost completely, or that normal
playback and recording will not be possible.
Please understand that in the event of repair
or replacement of the HDD or related
components, all your HDD recordings will be
lost.
1 After the message POWER OFF is
shown in the display, wait at least two
minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
• If there’s a power failure while the
recorder is on there is a chance that
some data on the HDD will be lost.
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
• The HDD is very delicate. If used
improperly or in an unsuitable
Symbols used in this manual
environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of
problemsincludeplaybackunexpectedly
freezing and noticeable block noise
(mosaic) in the picture. However,
sometimes there will be no warning
signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no
playback of recorded material will be
possible. In this case it will be necessary
to replace the HDD unit.
The following icons are provided to help you
quickly identify which instructions you need
for which kind of disc.
HDD
HDD
DVD
Any type of DVD disc
(recordable or playback
only), finalized or not.
DVD-Video
Using the external HDD
Commercially produced
For copyright protection purposes, the
external HDD cannot be used with any DVD
recorder other than the one that was used to
initialize it. If the HDD is connected to
another DVD recorder (even of the same
type), it will need to be re-initialized before
use.
DVD, finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW.
DVD (Video)
Video mode DVD-R/-RW
(unfinalized)
DVD (VR)
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
CD
VR mode DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R
If your DVD recorder develops a fault and
requires repair, the external HDD may need
to be re-initialized after reconnecting it.
All recorded data (including protected titles)
on the external HDD is erased if it is re-
initialized.
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
Do not disconnect from the recorder, or
unplug the power cord when the external
HDD is in use.
Audio CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
DivX
Video CD
Optimizing HDD performance
As you record and edit material on the HDD,
the data on the disk becomes fragmented,
eventually affecting the recorder’s
performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to
optimize the HDD (which you can do from
the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on
page 132).
Super VCD
WMA or MP3 files
DivX files
A L L
All of the above
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Rear panel connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
IN
PR
PB
Y
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
OUT
INPUT3
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
10
11
12
13
DVR-940HX-S
1
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
6
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Audio/video output SCART-type AV
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA
IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through
to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to
your TV.
connector for connecting to a TV or other
equipment with a SCART connector. The
video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on
page 141 for how to set this up.
7
ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT
Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) IN jack. The signal is passed
through to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT
jack for connection to your TV.
2
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV
connector
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV
connector for connecting to a VCR, or other
equipment with a SCART connector. The
input accepts video, S-video and RGB. See
8
COMMON INTERFACE slot
Slot for CA module and smart card used to
decode scrambled D.TV channels. See
Common Interface on page 15.
AV2/L1 In on page 142 for how to set this up.
3
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
9
HDMI OUT
A high-quality video output for connecting to
a TV or monitor with a component video
input.
HDMI output for high quality digital audio
and video.
10 AC IN – Power inlet
4
CONTROL IN
Use to control this recorder from the remote
sensor of another Pioneer component with a
CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the
Pioneer ꢁ mark. Connect the CONTROL
OUT of the other component to the
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-
plug cord.
11 OUTPUT
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video
outputs for connection to a TV or AV
amplifier/receiver.
12 INPUT 3
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video
inputs for connection to a VCR or other
source component.
5
G-LINK™
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable
®
to enable GUIDE Plus+ to control an
external satellite receiver, etc.
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
13 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL
Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to
an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/
MPEG decoder or other equipment with a
digital input.
Common Interface
To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will
need a CA module and smart card provided
by your service provider.
Different CA modules support different
encryption systems. This recorder is
designed to work with modules that support
the DVB standard. Contact your service
provider to obtain the right kind of CA
module.
Front panel connections
On the front panel a flip-down cover hides
more connections.
EXT. HDD
INPUT
2
AUDIO
USB
DV IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO L(MONO)
R
Note that neither CA modules nor smart
cards are supplied or sold by Pioneer.
14
15
16
17
18
Inserting a CA module
The Common Interface card slot is located
on the rear panel of the recorder.
14 EXT. HDD (DVR-940HX-S only)
Port for connecting the optional external
HDD.
1
Push the latch to release the slot
15 USB port (Type B)
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-
compatible printer.
cover on the rear of the recorder.
Slot cover latch
16 USB port (Type A)
USB port for connecting a digital camera,
USB memory or other USB device.
17 DV IN
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for
connecting a DV camcorder.
2
Insert the CA module into the card
slot as far as it will go.
18 INPUT 2
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio;
composite and S-video), especially suitable
for camcorders, game consoles, portable
audio, etc.
E
AC
INTERF
N
O
M
C
The Common Interface card slot accepts
Type I and Type II PC Cards (PCMCIA cards).
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
If your area is not yet served with terrestrial
digital services, connect your antenna’s
output to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN)
connector using one of the supplied RF
antenna cables. Next, connect the recorder
to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT
connector.
Connecting a TV antenna
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners
for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV
broadcasts.
If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts
now, use the longer of the supplied RF
antenna cables to connect the output of your
antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN
connector. Next use the short supplied RF
antenna cable and connect it between the
ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT and ANTENNA
IN (RF IN) connectors. Lastly, connect the
recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT
connector.
TV
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
OUT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN
P
R
PB
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
OUT
INPUT3
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
Antenna
wall outlet
TV
We strongly recommend using an outdoor
antenna for better broadcast picture quality.
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
OUT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN
PR
PB
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
INPUT3
OUT
If, however, you want to use an indoor
antenna, use one with a signal amplifier
rated at 5 V, 30 mA and set Aerial Power to
On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 139).
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
Antenna
wall outlet
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs,
and play discs. Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page.
Important
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a
SCART connection, if you want to use the supplied audio/video cable, see Using the
supplied audio/video cable on page 18.
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video,
plus stereo analog audio. The AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-
video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 141 and
AV2/L1 In on page 142 for how to set them up.
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components
are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
1
Connect your TV antenna to the
recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 16 for
details.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
• If you want to incorporate a VCR in your
setup, connect it before the recorder (i.e.,
between the antenna wall outlet and the
antenna input on the recorder).
2
TV
DVR-940HX-S
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
IN
PB
Y
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to
IN
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)
2
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
INPUT3
OUT
connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on
this recorder to the SCART AV connector on
your TV.
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
To recorder's
antenna input
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the
3
2
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a
SCART AV connector on your VCR.
ANTENNA
OUT
VCR
ANTENNA
IN
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function
which allows you to record a TV program
from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder
while watching a video playing on your
VCR (To use this feature when the
recorder is in standby, Power Save
must be set to Off—see Power Save on
page 137).
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
17
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
Using the S-video or component
video output
Using other types of audio/
video output
AUDIO
INPUT
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to
connect your TV to this recorder, there are
standard audio/video output jacks, as well as
an S-video and component video output.
S-VIDEO
INPUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
1
TV
Using the supplied audio/video
cable
2
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
IN
P
R
PB
Y
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
OUT
INPUT3
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
R
UDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
1
Connect the S-video or component
TV
video output to a similar input on your
TV.
For an S-video connection, use an S-video
cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO
OUTPUT jack to an S-video input on your TV.
1
2
HDMI OUT
OUT
IN
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)
2
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
INPUT3
OUT
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
For a component video connection, use a
component video cable (not supplied) to
connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
jacks to a component video input on your TV.
1
Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a
video input on your TV.
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/
video cable for the video connection.
See also Component Video Out on page 141
for how to set up the component video
output for use with a progressive scan-
compatible TV.
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to
the corresponding audio inputs on your
TV.
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied
audio/video cable for the audio connection.
Make sure you match up the left and right
outputs with their corresponding inputs for
correct stereo sound.
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to
the corresponding audio inputs on your
TV.
You can use the supplied audio/video cable,
leaving the yellow video plug disconnected.
Make sure you match up the left and right
outputs with their corresponding inputs for
correct stereo sound.
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting to a cable box or
satellite receiver
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
If you have a cable box or satellite receiver
with a built-in decoder, connect it to this
recorder and your TV as shown on the
2
TV
1
following page. If you are using a separate
decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set
up following the instructions on the next
page.
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
IN
P
R
PB
Y
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)
2
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
OUT
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
To recorder's
antenna input
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record any channel by selecting it on
the cable box, satellite receiver or digital
terrestrial receiver.
4
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
3
• Change channels and set timer
ANTENNA
OUT
recordings on the external receiver using
Cable/Satellite
receiver
ANTENNA
IN
®
the GUIDE Plus+ system (via the
1
G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).
Satellite dish/
antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Important
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV
‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or
other component. Always connect each
component directly to your TV or AV
amplifier/receiver.
• When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make a timer recording from an external
receiver, make sure that the external
receiver is switched on.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 16 for
more on RF antenna connections, including
from this recorder to your TV.
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to
connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
to a SCART AV connector on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3
Use another SCART cable to connect
the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV
connector to a SCART AV connector on
your cable box/satellite receiver.
This enables you to record scrambled TV
channels.
Note
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video con-
nections.
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
4
Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to
the G-LINK™ jack.
This enables you to control the tuner in the
®
external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+
system.
Position the IR transmitter end of the
G-LINK™ cable so that the IR receiver on
your cable/satellite receiver will pick up the
control signals (see diagram).
COMPONENT
OUT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN
PR
P
B
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-DEO
IN
UTPUT
DIG
AUDIO
IN
ANTENNA
OUT
INPUT3
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
C
G-LINK cable
See the manual that came with your cable/
satellite receiver if you’re not sure where the
IR receiver is on the front panel.
Alternatively, experiment with the remote
control, operating it from very close range
until you find the place where the receiver
responds.
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function
which allows you to record a TV program
from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder
while watching a video playing on your
VCR (To use this feature when the
recorder is in standby, Power Save
must be set to Off—see Power Save on
page 137).
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting an external
decoder box (1)
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
If you have an external, dedicated decoder
box for your satellite or cable TV system, use
the setup described on this page. See the
previous page for how to connect the
G-LINK™ cable.
4
TV
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
IN
P
R
PB
Y
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
INPUT3
OUT
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly
to this recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for
example, relating to pay TV services), is
only viewable when this recorder is off
(in standby).
3
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
2
Decoder
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
ANTENNA
IN
1
• For timer recording to work properly on
this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/
cable box must also be switched on
during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV
program and record another using this
setup.
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/
cable TV outlet to the antenna input on
your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to
connect your decoder to your VCR/
satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for
more detailed instructions.
3
Use a SCART cable to connect your
VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on
this recorder.
4
Use a SCART cable to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to your TV.
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
Connecting an external
decoder box (2)
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this
recorder and your TV as shown on this
page.
2
TV
1
Using the setup on this page you can:
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OUT
IN
P
R
P
B
Y
• Record scrambled channels received
using the recorder’s built-in analog TV
tuner.
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)
2
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
INPUT3
OUT
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
Important
3
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.
Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/
receiver.
Decoder
1
Connect your TV antenna to the
recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 16 for
details.
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to
connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
to a SCART AV connector on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3
Use another SCART cable to connect
the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV
connector to a SCART AV connector on
your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV
channels.
Note
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 142).
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual
CH Setting on page 140).
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting to an AV
amplifier/receiver
VIDEO
IN
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you
need to connect this recorder to an AV
amplifier/receiver using the digital coaxial
output.
TV
4
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
IN
In addition to a digital connection, we
recommend also connecting using the
stereo analog connection for compatibility
with all discs and sources.
DIGITAL
IN
2
AV amp/receiver
3
You’ll probably also want to connect a video
output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the
ordinary video output (as shown here), or the
S-video output.
HDMI OUT
OUT
IN
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)
2
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
INPUT3
OUT
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
1
Connect your TV antenna to the
recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 16 for
Important
• Noise may be output from your speakers
if the recorder is not set up to work with
your AV amplifier/receiver properly (see
Audio Out on page 143).
• When watching D.TV only linear PCM
audio is output from the coaxial digital
out jack.
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV
‘through’ your VCR using A/V cables.
Always connect it directly to your TV.
details.
This enables you to watch and record TV
channels.
2
Connect the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL
jack on this recorder to a coaxial digital
input on your AV amplifier/receiver.
This enables you to listen to multichannel
surround sound.
3
Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT
and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on this recorder
to an analog audio and video input on
your AV amplifier/receiver.
4
Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s
video output to a video input on your TV.
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There
are however settings you can change if you
need to. See HDMI Output (only available
when an HDMI device is connected) on
page 148 for more information. Note that the
HDMI settings remain in effect until you
change them, or connect a new HDMI
component.
Connecting using HDMI
1
If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped
2
monitor or display , you can connect it to
this recorder using an HDMI cable (not
supplied).
The HDMI connector outputs uncom-
pressed digital video, as well as almost every
kind of digital audio.
Important
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect the
• An HDMI connection can only be made
with DVI-equipped components compat-
ible with both DVI and High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you
choose to connect to a DVI connector,
you will need a DVI to HDMI adaptor
cable. A DVI to HDCP connection,
however, does not support audio.
Consult your local audio dealer for more
information.
HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to
an HDMI connector on an HDMI-compat-
ible monitor.
HDMI
IN
HDMI-compatible display
• The HDMI connection is compatible with
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/
20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM
signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and
MPEG audio bitstream.
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
OUT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN
P
R
PB
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
CONTROL G-LINK
S-VIDEO
IN
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)
2
AC IN
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
IN
ANTENNA
INPUT3
OUT
AV
1
(RGB) – TV
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
COMMON INTERFACE
• If your connected component is only
compatible with Linear PCM, the signal
is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is
not output).
• If you have connected to a Pioneer
plasma display, please select the HDMI
setup on the display (refer to the
• The arrow on the cable connector body
should be face down for correct align-
ment with the connector on the
recorder.
When connected to an HDMI component or
HDCP-compatible DVI component, the
HDMI indicator lights.
supplied manual for more on this).
Note
1 This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) version 1.2a and
HDCP version 1.1. Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in
unreliable signal transfers.
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280
x 720p, 1920 x 1080i, DVR-940HX-S only: 1920 x 1080p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i,
DVR-940HX-S only: 1920 x 1080p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be
correctly reproduced.
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
About HDMI
Connecting other AV sources
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
supports both video and audio on a single
digital connection for use with DVD players
and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other
AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide
the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital
Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital
Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification.
HDCP is used to protect digital content
transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
Connecting a VCR or analog
camcorder
ꢂ
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
HDD1 HDD2
DivX
DVD
PLTV
ꢁ
A.TV
D.TV
HDMI
COPY
EXT. HDD
ꢄ
ꢅ
–
CH
+
INPUT
2
ꢃ
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
ꢀ
REC
USB
DV IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO L(MONO)
R
INPUT ONE TOUCH PAUSE
LIVE TV
HELP A.TV/D.TV SELECT
COPY
DVR-940HX-S
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
(Rear panel)
(Front panel)
HDMI has the capability to support stan-
dard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus
standard to multi-channel surround-sound
audio. HDMI features include uncom-
pressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5
gigabits per second (Dual Link), one
1
2
Analog camcorder
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
connector (instead of several cables and
connectors), and communication between
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
VCR
1
Connect a set of audio and video
inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set
of outputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder
to your VCR or camcorder.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or regis-
tered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.
• You can use standard video or S-video
cables for the video connection.
• Alternatively, you can use the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART
connector for audio/video input and
output with just one SCART cable.
2
Connect a set of audio and video
outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a
set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your
VCR or camcorder.
• You can use standard video or S-video
cables for the video connection.
• The front panel connections make
convenient connections for a camcorder
input.
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
Connecting a DV camcorder
Important
Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is
possible to connect a DV camcorder or video
deck, or DVD-R/-RW recorder and digitally
transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/-RW discs to
DVD-R/-RW.
• Some USB devices may not work with
this recorder.
• Devices may not work reliably if
connected to this recorder via a USB
hub.
Important
JPEG file storage devices
• Digital still camera
• This jack is for connection to DV
equipment only. It is not compatible with
digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video
decks.
• Memory card reader (any type of
memory card)
• USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the
device is partitioned, this recorder may not
recognize it.
ꢂ
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
HDD1 HDD2
DivX
DVD
PLTV
ꢁ
A.TV
D.TV
HDMI
COPY
EXT. HDD
ꢄ
ꢅ
–
CH
+
INPUT
2
ꢃ
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
ꢀ
REC
USB
DV IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO L(MONO)
R
INPUT ONE TOUCH PAUSE
HELP A.TV/D.TV SELECT COPY LIVE TV
DV
IN
DVR-940HX-S
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be
used to transfer up to about 4000 files.
DV
OUT
WMA/MP3 file storage devices
• Memory card reader (any type of
memory card)
DV camcorder
• Use a DV cable (not supplied) to
connect the DV jack of your DV
camcorder/video deck to the front
panel DV IN jack of this recorder.
• USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the
device is partitioned, this recorder may not
recognize it.
Connecting a USB device
Note that although multi-slot card readers
can be used, the recorder will only recognize
the first card inserted. To read another card,
remove all the cards and insert the card to be
read again.
Using the USB ports on the front of the
recorder you can connect USB devices such
as digital cameras and printers. Please also
see the instructions that came with the
device you want to connect before using.
Using a USB printer
ꢂ
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.
HDD1 HDD2
DivX
DVD
PLTV
ꢁ
A.TV
D.TV
HDMI
COPY
EXT. HDD
ꢄ
ꢅ
–
CH
+
INPUT
2
ꢃ
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
ꢀ
REC
USB
DV IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO L(MONO)
R
INPUT ONE TOUCH PAUSE
HELP A.TV/D.TV SELECT COPY LIVE TV
DVR-940HX-S
USB
Type B
USB
Type A
USB
USB
Digital Camera
PictBridge-compatible
Printer
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
• When using an external HDD for the first
time, or when connecting an external
HDD you have been using with another
device, this recorder checks the disk and
then displays the following screen:
Connecting the optional
external HDD (DVR-940HX-S only)
• For information on which external HDDs
can be used with this recorder, please
refer to the Pioneer Web site.
DVD RECORDER
HELP
The format of the connected external
HDD cannot be used by this recorder.
Would you like to initialize it?
(www.pioneer-eur.com)
• See also Using the external HDD on
page 13.
* Initializing the external HDD will
erase all the data on it.
ꢁ
OPEN/CLOSE
A.TV
HDD/DVD
COPY
After initializing, the data will be
unreadable to other devices.
HDD1 HDD2
DivX
DVD
PLTV
ꢀ
D.TV
HDMI
EXT. HDD
ꢄ
ꢅ
–
CH
+
INPUT
2
ꢂ
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
ꢃ
REC
USB
DV IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO L(MONO)
R
INPUT ONE TOUCH PAUSE
HELP A.TV/D.TV SELECT COPY LIVE TV
Yes
No
DVR-940HX-S
EXT. HDD
Select Yes and press ENTER to initialize
the external HDD.
EXT. HDD
Note, however, that this screen does not
appear if you connect the HDD before
switching on for the first time and using
the Setup Navigator. In this case, after
completing the Setup Navigator see
Initialize HDD on page 132.
External HDD
1
Make sure that this recorder is
switched off and the external HDD
disconnected from the power before
proceeding.
• After the external HDD has been
initialized, the following screen screen is
displayed. Press HELP to dismiss.
2
Connect the external HDD to this
recorder.
Use the cable supplied with the external
HDD for this, connecting it to the EXT. HDD
port on the front of this recorder.
DVD RECORDER
HELP
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is
a fragile device. In the event of HDD
failure, recordings may be lost or
normal playback/recording may not be
possible.
3
Connect the AC adapter to the
external HDD and plug in to a power
outlet.
The recorder is now ready to be turned on.
The external HDD switches on and off
automatically with the recorder.
Lost recordings cannot be recovered.
Please use the HDD as a temporary
place to store recordings.
Please back up important recordings to
DVD.
Before you can use the external HDD it will
be necessary to initialize it. See Initialize
HDD on page 132.
Plugging in
• This recorder only supports connection
of one external HDD at a time.
• Initializing the external HDD will erase
all the data on it. (Likewise, if you
After checking all the connections, plug in
the recorder.
connect an external HDD you have been
using with this recorder to another
device and initialize it for use with that
device, all the data will be erased.)
•
Use the supplied power cable to
connect this recorder to a power outlet.
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Controls and displays
CChaoptnert3rols and displays
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9 10 11
12
ꢂ
OPEN/CLOSE
A.TV
HDD/DVD
COPY
HDD1 HDD2
DivX
DVD
PLTV
ꢁ
D.TV
HDMI
EXT. HDD
ꢅ
+
ꢄ
–
CH
INPUT
2
ꢃ
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
ꢀ
REC
USB
DV IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO L(MONO)
R
INPUT ONE TOUCH PAUSE
HELP A.TV/D.TV SELECT COPY LIVE TV
13
14 15 16 17 18
HDD and DVD indicators
DVR-940HX-S
1
ꢃ STANDBY/ON
5
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
DVR-940HX-S: HDD1 / HDD2 / DVD
Indicator lights blue when the internal
hard disk (HDD1) is selected; yellow
when the external hard disk (HDD2) is
selected; orange when the DVD drive is
selected.
2
3
Disc tray
A.TV indicator
Lights when analog TV is selected.
D.TV indicator
Lights when digital TV is selected.
DVR-545HX-S: HDD / DVD
Indicator lights blue when the hard disk
(HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD
drive is selected.
DivX indicator
Lights during DivX playback. (Copy
indicator lights during copying.)
6
HDD/DVD
PLTV indicator
Lights during recording started using
the Pause Live TV feature.
1
Press to switch between HDD and DVD for
recording and playback.
HDMI indicator
7
Front panel display and IR remote
Lights when this recorder is connected
to HDMI (HDCP) compatible
component.
sensor
See Display on page 30 for details.
8
ꢄ
COPY
Light during copying.
Press to start or restart playback.
9
ꢅ
4
ꢂ OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
Press to stop playback.
10 CH +/–
Use to change channels, skip chapters/
tracks, etc.
Note
1 DVR-940HX-S: When an external HDD is connected, press to switch between HDD1 (internal), HDD2 (external)
and DVD.
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
11 ꢀ (STOP REC)
Press to stop recording.
12 ꢀ REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to
set the recording time in 30 minute blocks.
13 Front panel inputs
See Front panel connections on page 15 for
more information on these.
14 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI
screen.
15 A.TV / D.TV
Switches between analog TV antenna input
and digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and
D.TV indicators show which is selected.
16 INPUT SELECT
Press to change the input to use for
recording.
17 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 110)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the
currently playing title to DVD or the (internal)
HDD.
18 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 75)
Press to start recording the current TV
channel, but with playback paused,
effectively pausing the broadcast.
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Controls and displays
Display
1
2
3
4
5
L
R
P
8
7
6
1
ꢄ
5
Recording quality indicators (page 72)
Lights during playback; blinks when
playback is paused.
XP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
2
ꢀ
XP (best quality).
Lights when copying.
SP
3
ꢀ
Lights when the recording mode is set to
SP (standard play).
Lights during recording; blinks when
recording is paused.
LP / SLP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
LP (long play) or SLP (super-long play).
4
(page 55)
Lights when a timer recording has been
set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has
been set to DVD but there isn’t a
recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to record to the HDD but the
EP / SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
EP (extended play) or SEP (super-
extended play).
1
HDD is not recordable. )
MN
NTSC
Lights when the recording mode is set to
Lights when the video output signal
MN (manual recording level) mode.
format is NTSC.
6
7
Character display
R / RW
(page 142)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual
broadcast are recorded.
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW
disc is loaded.
(page 141)
8
PL (page 98)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded
and the recorder is in Play List mode.
Lights when the component video output
is set to progressive scan (except in
some cases when a component is
connected using HDMI).
2 3 (page 149)
Shows the remote control mode (if
nothing is displayed, the remote control
mode is 1).
VPS / PDC (page 55)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC
broadcast during a VPS/PDC-enabled
timer recording.
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode
disc is loaded.
Note
1 DVR-940HX-S: If the timer is set to record to the external HDD, but the external HDD is not recordable, the timer
indicator does not blink to warn of this.
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
ꢉ ꢊ (page 87)
Remote control
(DVR-940HX-S)
Press to start reverse or forward
scanning. Press again to change the
speed.
STANDBY/ON
HDD/DVD
ꢋ/ꢌ ꢍ/ꢎ (page 88)
1
12
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly
to change the playback speed.
PREV
PAUSE
STOP
NEXT
INFO
2
PLAY
13
14
HELP
REC
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
3
TOP MENU
HOME MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
GUIDE
4
5
15
16
®
When GUIDE Plus+ is displayed, use
CHANNEL
+
CM BACK
to display the previous/next day.
ENTER
3
HELP
–
CHANNEL
CM SKIP
A.TV/D.TV
RETURN/EXIT
Press for help on how to use the current GUI
screen.
6
7
17
18
4
DISC NAVIGATOR (page 86, 98) / TOP
PAUSE
LIVE TV
TIMER
REC
ONE TOUCH
REC MODE
COPY
MENU (page 83)
8
9
19
20
21
22
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ABC
ANGLE INPUT SELECT
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen,
or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized
DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded.
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
MENU
GHI
JKL
DISPLAY
10
11
5
ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ and ENTER (Smart Jog)
Used to navigate all on-screen displays.
Press ENTER to select the currently
highlighted option.
PQRS
TUV
+
CLEAR CLEAR
TV CONTROL
TEXT
23
24
INPUT SELECT CHANNEL VOLUME
TV/DVD
When using the Smart Jog, turn it lighty
to avoid pressing down on the cursor
keys.
OPEN
While watching D.TV press ENTER to
display the Channel List screen.
1
ꢃ STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Turn the Smart Jog counter-clockwise
during playback to skip progressively
backward through the audio or video
playing.
2
ꢄ PLAY (page 81)
Press to start playback.
ꢆ PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
ꢅ STOP (page 81)
Press to stop playback.
Turn the Smart Jog clockwise during
playback to skip progressively forward
through the audio or video playing.
ꢇ PREV ꢈ NEXT
Press to skip to the previous or next title/
chapter/track/folder; or to display the
previous or next menu page.
CHANNEL +/– (page 69)
While stopped, turn the Smart Jog to
change the channel of the built-in TV
tuner.
®
When GUIDE Plus+ is displayed, use
to display the previous/next page.
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Controls and displays
6
A.TV / D.TV
13 Recording controls (page 73)
Press to switch between analog TV antenna
input and digital TV antenna input. The A.TV
and D.TV indicators on the front panel show
which is selected.
ꢀ REC
Press to start recording. Press
repeatedly to set the recording time in
blocks of 30 mins.
7
Colour buttons
When the red action button is visible in a
GUIDE Plus+ screen, use for One-
Button-Record.
(RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE)
Use when an EPG screen is displayed or
when tuned to a data channel of a digital
broadcast. The function of each button
will be described on-screen, and
changes depending on the screen being
displayed.
®
ꢀ STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
14 INFO
While watching D.TV, press to display the
information banner.
8
PAUSE LIVE TV (page 75)
Press to start recording the current TV
channel, but with playback paused,
effectively pausing the broadcast.
Press to see additional information for the
highlighted item in the EPG.
15 GUIDE
9
AUDIO (page 70, 71, 91, 92)
Press to display the EPG screen; press again
to exit.
Press to change the audio language or
channel. (When the recorder is stopped,
press to change the tuner audio.)
16 HOME MENU
Press to display the Home Menu, from
which you can navigate all the functions of
the recorder.
SUBTITLE (page 91)
Press to display/change the subtitles
included in multilingual DVD-Video
discs.
17 RETURN/EXIT
Press to go back one level in the on-screen
menu or display.
While watching D.TV, press to change
the D.TV subtitles.
Also press to exit the MHEG application.
ANGLE (page 92)
Press to switch camera angles on discs
with multi-angle scenes.
18 TIMER REC (page 45)
Press to set a timer recording from the
®
GUIDE Plus+ system.
10 Number buttons, CLEAR, +
REC MODE (page 72)
Press repeatedly to change the
recording mode (picture quality).
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/
title selection; channel selection, and so on.
The same buttons can also be used to enter
names for titles, discs and so on.
19 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 110)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the
currently playing title to DVD or the (internal)
HDD.
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.
11 TV CONTROL buttons (page 153)
After setting up, use these controls to
control your TV.
20 INPUT SELECT (page 78)
Press to change the input to use for
recording.
12 HDD/DVD (page 73)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD or HDD2)
or DVD for recording and playback.
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
21 MENU (page 83)
Remote control
(DVR-545HX-S)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-
Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW or finalized
DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded.
STANDBY/ON
HDD/DVD
®
When in the GUIDE Plus+ system, use to
ꢃ
1
2
11
PAUSE LIVE TV HOME MENU
INFO
jump directly to the Menu bar.
12
13
14
TOP MENU
22 DISPLAY (page 93)
Displays/changes the on-screen information
displays.
DISC
NAVIGATOR
GUIDE
3
4
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
ENTER
23 TEXT
PAUSE
RETURN/EDIT
Press to start the MHEG application display,
if available, while watching a digital channel
(UK only).
5
6
15
REC
PLAY
PREV
STOP
16
STOP REC
NEXT
17
24 TV/DVD
CHANNEL
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which
you get the picture and sound from the TV’s
tuner, and ‘DVD mode’, in which you get
picture and sound from the recorder’s tuner
(or an external input).
TIMER REC
ꢋ/
A.TV/D.TV
TV/DVD
7
8
18
19
/ꢎ HELP
ONE TOUCH COPY
REC MODE
20
21
22
23
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE INPUT SELECT
PLAY MODE MENU
9
SHIFT
CLEAR
DISPLAY
TEXT
10
OPEN
1
ꢃ STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
2
PAUSE LIVE TV (page 75)
Press to start recording the current TV
channel, but with playback paused,
effectively pausing the broadcast.
3
DISC NAVIGATOR (page 86, 98) / TOP
MENU (page 83)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen,
or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized
DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded.
4
ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ and ENTER
Used to navigate all on-screen displays.
Press ENTER to select the currently
highlighted option.
While watching D.TV press ENTER to
display the Channel List screen.
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Controls and displays
ꢋ/ꢌ ꢍ/ꢎ (page 88)
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively
backward through the audio or video
playing.
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly
to change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively
forward through the audio or video
playing.
®
When GUIDE Plus+ is displayed, use
to display the previous/next day.
5
ꢆ PAUSE
9
Number buttons, CLEAR
Press to pause playback or recording.
Use the number buttons for track/
chapter/title selection; channel
selection, and so on. The same buttons
can also be used to enter names for
titles, discs and so on.
6
Recording controls (page 73)
ꢀ REC
Press to start recording. Press
repeatedly to set the recording time in
blocks of 30 mins.
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start
again.
When the red action button is visible in a
GUIDE Plus+ screen, use for One-
Button-Record.
REC MODE (page 72)
®
Hold SHIFT and press repeatedly to
change the recording mode (picture
quality).
ꢀ STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
AUDIO (page 70, 71, 91, 92)
Hold SHIFT and press to change the
audio language or channel. (When the
recorder is stopped, press to change the
tuner audio.)
7
Colour buttons
(RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE)
Use when an EPG screen is displayed or
when tuned to a data channel of a digital
broadcast. The function of each button
will be described on-screen, and
changes depending on the screen being
displayed.
SUBTITLE (page 91)
Hold SHIFT and press to display/change
the subtitles included in multilingual
DVD-Video discs.
TIMER REC (page 45)
Hold SHIFT and press to set a timer
recording from the GUIDE Plus+
system.
While watching D.TV, press to change
the D.TV subtitles.
®
ANGLE (page 92)
Hold SHIFT and press to switch camera
angles on discs with multi-angle scenes.
A.TV / D.TV
Hold SHIFT and press to switch between
analog TV antenna input and digital TV
antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV
indicators on the front panel show which
is selected.
PLAY MODE (page 88)
Hold SHIFT and press to change the play
mode (search, repeat, program play,
etc.).
10 SHIFT
Use to access functions on the remote
printed in green.
8
ꢉ ꢊ (page 87)
Press to start reverse or forward
scanning. Press again to change the
speed.
34
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
11 HDD/DVD (page 73)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD
for recording and playback.
20 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 110)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.
12 INFO
21 INPUT SELECT (page 78)
Press to change the input to use for
recording.
While watching D.TV, press to display the
information banner.
Press to see additional information for the
highlighted item in the EPG.
22 MENU (page 83)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-
Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW or finalized
DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded.
13 HOME MENU
Press to display the Home Menu, from
which you can navigate all the functions of
the recorder.
®
When in the GUIDE Plus+ system, use to
jump directly to the Menu bar.
14 GUIDE
23 DISPLAY (page 93)
Press to display the EPG screen; press again
to exit.
Displays/changes the on-screen
information displays.
15 RETURN/EXIT
Press to go back one level in the on-screen
menu or display.
TEXT
Hold SHIFT and press to start the MHEG
application display, if available, while
watching a digital channel (UK only).
Also press to exit the MHEG application.
16 ꢀ PLAY (page 81)
Press to start playback.
ꢁ STOP (page 81)
Press to stop playback.
17 ꢂ PREV ꢃ NEXT
Press to skip to the previous or next title/
chapter/track/folder; or to display the
previous or next menu page.
®
When GUIDE Plus+ is displayed, use
to display the previous/next page.
CHANNEL +/– (page 69)
Press to change the channel of the built-
in TV tuner.
18 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI
screen.
19 TV/DVD
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which
you get the picture and sound from the TV’s
tuner, and ‘DVD mode’, in which you get
picture and sound from the recorder’s tuner
(or an external input).
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Getting started
Chapter 4
Getting started
Switching on and setting up
ENTER
4
Start the Setup Navigator.
When you switch the recorder on for the first
time, you can make several basic settings
using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes
you through setting the clock, the internal TV
tuner and the video output.
k
Complete this setup before you
t
start using your recorder.
e
P
Start
Cancel
p
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
If you’re using the recorder for the first time,
we strongly recommend you use the Setup
Navigator before starting to use the
recorder.
• If you don’t want to use the Setup
Navigator, press ꢂ to select Cancel,
then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
1
Switch on your TV and set the video
input to this recorder.
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
5
Select an Aerial Power
ꢃ
2
Switch on the recorder.
1
setting for the built-in digital tuner.
• On: power is always supplied to the
connected aerial, whether the recorder
is on or in standby.
When you switch on for the first time, your
TV should display the Setup Navigator
screen (If the Setup Navigator doesn’t
appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 137).
• Auto: power is only supplied when this
recorder is on.
• Off: power is never supplied to the
aerial.
• If this recorder is connected to a
compatible TV using a fully-wired 21-pin
SCART cable, the recorder will take a few
seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check
the manual that came with your TV for
compatibility information.)
ENTER
6
Select ‘Auto Scan’ to start
scanning for D.TV channels.
• Select Do not set if you want to skip
D.TV channel setup (because they have
already been set up, for example), then
skip to step 8 below.
ENTER
3
Choose a language (then
press ENTER).
Initial Setup
ENTER
Basic
Clock Language
Input
Powe
HELP
7
Select your country.
Digital Tuner
Analogue Tuner
Video In/ Out
Audio In
The recorder starts scanning for new
channels. After the scan is complete the
recorder will let you know how many new
channels were found.
EPG
Paus
Setup
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Note
1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off), check that the antenna
is properly connected and that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again.
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
• The country setting will apply to both the
digital and analog TV tuners.
• The clock will also be set automatically
here if D.TV channels are found.
•
Downloading channels from your TV
Use the Download from TV option to
download all the channels that your TV is
tuned to.
• If no new channels were found a
message appears asking if you want to
scan again. Check the aerial connection
before selecting Yes. (If you select No,
skip to step 8 below.)
Downloading
Pr 5
32/99
Cancel
ENTER
9
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic
ENTER
time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock
manually.
If the clock was already set from a D.TV
8
Select the analog TV (A.TV)
Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’.
channel in step 6, this step is skipped.
k
AutoChannel Setting
k
ClockSetting
e
P
AutoScan
er
P
Auto
Download from TV
Manual
p Do not Set
•
Auto clock setting
• Select Do not set if you want to skip
channel setup (because they have
already been set up, for example).
• You can only use the Download from
TV feature if this recorder is connected
to your TV using a fully-wired 21-pin
SCART cable via the AV1(RGB)-TV
connector, and if your TV supports this
function (check your TV’s instruction
manual for more details).
Some TV channels broadcast time
signals together with the program. This
recorder can use these signals to set the
clock automatically.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel
preset number that broadcasts a time
signal, then move the cursor down to
‘Start’ and press ENTER.
k
AutoClock Setting
Date
––
––
/
:
––
––
/
––––
e
Time
ENTER
P
p
•
•
Select your country.
Clock Set CH
Pr
1
Start
k
Country Selection
t
eCountry
P
The recorder takes a short while to set
the time. After you see that it’s set, select
Next to proceed.
UK
Auto-tuning channels
The Auto Scan option automatically scans
and sets the channel presets.
k
AutoClock Setting
Date
SUN 01
11
/
01
20
/
2006
e
Time
:
P
Tuning
p
Clock Set CH
Pr
1
Start
Next
32/99
Cancel
If the time could not be set
automatically, press RETURN/EXIT to go
back to the previous screen and select
Manual.
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Getting started
•
Manual clock setting
ENTER
If no stations in your area are
broadcasting time signals, you can set
the clock manually.
10
Select the EPG (Electronic
Program Guide) type to use.
• GUIDE Plus+: Use the Gemstar GUIDE
Plus+ EPG (see also Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+® system on page 40 and
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic
program guide on page 44).
Use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to set your
time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a
time relative to GMT.
1/2
• Digital EPG: Use the SI EPG (program
information broadcast together with
digital channels).
k
Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
England
London
e
P
p Summer Time
Off
• If no channels were found when
scanning for digital TV channels then
this screen does not appear and the EPG
is set according to the country set in step
7 above.
Press ꢂthen use the ꢃ/ꢀbuttons to
select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for summer time,
then press ENTER.
Select On if you are currently using
summer time.
ENTER
1/2
k
Manual Clock Setting
11
Select the TV screen type,
Time Zone
England
London
‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’.
e
P
p Summer Time
On
k
TVScreen Size
er
P
Wide (16:9)
Set the date (day/month/year) and
time, then press ENTER to make all
the settings.
Standard (4:3)
p Navigator
ENTER
2/2
k
Manual Clock Setting
12
Select whether or not your TV
Date
e
SUN 01
/
:
01
00
/
2006
is compatible with progressive scan
video.
P
Time
p
Time Zone
00
England
London
k
Progressive
Summer Time
On
er
P
Compatible
Not Compatible
• Use the ꢁ/ꢂ buttons to change the
value in the highlighted field.
p Don't Know
• Use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to move from one
• Note that progressive scan video is only
output through the AV1(RGB)-TV
connector and the component video
outputs.
field to another.
• You can go back to the previous screen
at anytime in the Setup Navigator by
pressing RETURN/EXIT.
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
For users receiving digital
broadcast services
ENTER
13
Press to continue after reading
the HDD caution.
k Inthe event of HDD failure, recordings may
be lost or normal playback/recording may
This unit can set its internal clock
automatically from digital broadcasts.
However, depending on the broadcaster, the
clock information received may not be
accurate.
not be possible.
e
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD
P
failure, we recommend to use the HDD only
as temporary storage media.
p
Please copy recordings you want to keep
to recordable DVD.
Press ENTER to continue.
Use the following procedure (while the
recorder is not recording) to set the clock
manually.
ENTER
14
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit
the Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you
want to start again.
HOME MENU
1
Press HOME MENU.
k
Setting
ENTER
Setupis complete!
eEnjoy using your DVD recorder!
Finish Setup
2
Select 'Initial Setup' > 'Basic' >
'Clock Setting'.
p
Go Back
3
Highlight the time setting.
That completes basic setup using the Setup
Navigator.
ENTER
4
Press ENTER to display the
• If there are blank channels with no
station, you can set these to skip using
the manual channel setting. See Manual
CH Setting on page 140.
manual clock setting screen.
5
Set the correct time.
• DVR-940HX-S: A connected external HDD
cannot be initialized from the Setup
Navigator—please refer to Initialize HDD
on page 132.
Return to automatic clock setting
• To return to the automatic clock setting,
follow the instructions for 'Replace
Channels' (page 138).
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Getting started
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+®
system
GUIDE
1
Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup
menu.
This section is only applicable if you chose to
use the GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type
in step 10 of the Setup Navigator above.
®
The GUIDE Plus+ system is a free,
interactive on-screen television
programming guide. The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-
touch recording, search by genre,
recommendations according to your profile
and more.
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function
correctly, it is important that you set the
language and country correctly in the Setup
Navigator, and that you have performed a
scan for available channels, as these are all
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of
these things are not yet set, please run the
Setup Navigator first (see Switching on and
setting up on page 36).
The language and country settings are
already set to whatever you selected in the
Setup Navigator.
ENTER
2
Highlight ‘Postal Code’.
TV listings information is received via ‘host
channels’. In order to receive the correct TV
listings information for your country or
region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+
system and ‘download’ the TV listings
information. The initial download can take
up to 24 hours, but once this is done, all
future updates are automatic.
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
After pressing ENTER:
• Select your reception method
ENTER
(Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite).
• Select your provider (if applicable).
• Select the brand of your external
receiver.
3
Enter your postal
code.
• Identify which input your external
receiver is connected to.
After completing these steps the recorder
will try and communicate with your external
receiver and change the channel via the G-
LINK cable. If the channel was successfully
changed, select Yes to confirm.
If the channel did not change, select No. The
GUIDE Plus+ system will try other codes
assigned to your external receiver. If none of
the codes changes the channel
successfully, tune your external receiver to
the host channel for your country (refer to
step 5 below) and leave it on overnight. The
recorder needs to be in standby; it will wake
up automatically and download new codes
from the host channel. The next day, try this
setup process again:
The system uses your postal code to identify
which TV listings data is correct for the area
in which you live, so it is important that you
enter it correctly.
4
If you are using an external receiver
(such as a satellite receiver) with the
supplied G-LINK cable, complete this
step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.
• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE
Plus+ screen.
• Press ꢁ to highlight the Menu bar, then
use ꢀ to reach the Setup area and
select Setup.
• Continue setting up from the start of this
step again.
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond
to the G-LINK controller, please call
customer support and report the brand and
model of your external receiver.
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting on page 59.
5
Identify the host channel for your
• See Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver on page 19 for more on using the
supplied G-LINK cable.
• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then
press ENTER. (If you have just one
external receiver, use External Receiver
1. You can add further receivers in 2 and
3 if you need to.)
country.
The TV listings information available in the
GUIDE Plus+ system is distributed
throughout Europe by selected broadcasters
called host channels. It is important that the
host (analog) channel for your country is
correctly identified in order to receive
listings information (EPG download).
41
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Getting started
Follow A, B or C below depending on your
setup:
About EPG download
• EPG data can only be received when the
recorder is in standby. (When not using
the recorder, therefore, please switch it
into standby.) If you’re using an external
receiver, leave this on when EPG data is
downloading.
A If you are not using an external
receiver, this recorder will automatically
scan all channels for the host channel:
• Leave the recorder in standby overnight
(do not leave it switched on).
• If you cannot receive any of the host
channels (see the above table) then you
won’t be able to use the GUIDE Plus+
system. In this case do not set the postal
code (or set Country to Other) in the
GUIDE Plus+ setup screen. (When
GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area,
set the postal code again.)
B If you are using an external receiver,
you need to identify the host channel
from the table below:
Country/ Host
Comments
Region
Austria
channels
Eurosport
Belgium
RTL-TVI
Music
TMF will be switched
off in the near future.
If digital broadcasts start in your area,
please set the EPG Type Select setting in
the Initial Setup menu to Digital EPG.
Factory (TMF)
France
Germany
Italy
Canal+
Eurosport
MTV
Analog only
• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions
where you live, you can still set VIDEO
Plus+ timer recordings and manual
recordings — see Setting a manual
recording on page 54.
• The front panel display shows EPG when
receiving data. If you power on the
recorder during an EPG download, the
download is canceled.
• EPG data may be received several times
a day. All updates are automatic.
• When downloading EPG data, the
recorder may sound as though it is on.
This is normal.
Analog only
Netherlands Music
Factory
TMF will be switched
off in the near future.
(TMF),
Eurosport
Tele 5
Switzerland Eurosport
Spain
Analog only
UK
ITV, Eurosport ITV is analog only. Use
Eurosport if you are a
SKY subscriber and
you no longer have an
analog terrestrial
antenna.
• Tune your external receiver to the
appropriate host channel and leave the
receiver on and the recorder in standby
overnight.
C If you use both an external receiver
and this recorder as sources, follow the
instructions above for setting up without
an external receiver. Only if this is
unsuccessful try the external receiver
method.
42
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Checking the downloaded data the
following day
2
Change the program
GUIDE
1
Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
numbers as you like.
Changing the program numbers allows you
to decide the order in which the channels
change when stepping through them
sequentially. You can do this to group
certain channels together, for example.
Name
BBC1
BBC2
ITV
CH4
CH5
BBC3
ITV2
E4
On/Off Source
Prog. No.
001
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
You should see a grid filled with channel
logos and TV listings information. Use the
ꢁ/ꢂ buttons to review the list. If you notice
that there are channels missing, or that
there are channels in the list that you don’t
get, go to the Editor screen:
UKGOL
3
When you’re done, press the BLUE
Action button (Home) to get back to the
GUIDE Plus+ home screen.
• Press ꢁrepeatedly until the Menu bar is
highlighted.
• You can find detailed information on
using the GUIDE Plus+ system in the
following chapter.
• Press ꢀ until Editor is highlighted. The
main area of the screen now shows a list
of channels. Those that are turned ON
are displayed in the grid; those that are
OFF are hidden. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ
buttons to move down the list and turn
channels ON or OFF as necessary.
• For any channel that you turn ON, the
GUIDE Plus+ system will need to know
how it is received (the source) and on
which program number. The source may
be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or
an external receiver. The program
number is the number on which the
channel can be found on its receiving
device/source. The entry in the Editor
screen must match this number for
correct recording of that channel.
• The above is especially important for the
‘host channel’. Please make sure that
the host channel is always switched ON.
43
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
Chapter 5
Using the GUIDE Plus+®
electronic program guide
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type
Select setting made in the Setup Navigator (or
the Initial Setup menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+.
Legal Notice
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY
LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM
SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
The GUIDE Plus+ system
®
The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free,
interactive on-screen television
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION
WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES
RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
1
programming guide. The system provides
program listings for all major channels, one-
touch recording, searching by genre,
recommendations according to your profile
and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a
convenient way to find out what's on right
now or during the coming week, by channel
or by genre. The GUIDE Plus+ system also
allows you to automatically set your viewing
and recording selections quickly and easily.
In order to receive the correct TV listings
information for your country or region you
need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and
‘download’ the TV listings information. If you
haven’t already done this, please turn to
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on
page 40 before proceeding.
* GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+,
G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under
license from and (3) subject of various
international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide
International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.
Note
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line
System on page 137).
44
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
GUIDE Plus+ navigation
Using the GUIDE Plus+
system
The table below shows a summary of the
remote buttons you’ll use to navigate the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
All the various features and areas are colour-
coded for ease of navigation. All screens
(with the exception of some setup screens)
have the following common elements:
Key
What it does
Press to set or cancel One
Button Recording.
ì REC
Press to display the GUIDE
Plus+ screen (also use to
exit).
GUIDE
3
4
1
5
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ
Use to navigate screens
(highlight an item).
RED, GREEN,
YELLOW, BLUE functionality depending on
Action buttons that change
6
2
the Area.
MENU
Press to jump directly to the
Menu bar.
1 Video window – Allows you to continue
watching the current program while
using the GUIDE Plus+ system.
2 Information panels – Display program
promotions or instructions on the GUIDE
Plus+ system.
3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action
buttons change function depending on
the area.
DVR-940HX-S:
TIMER REC
DVR-545HX-S:
SHIFT + RED
Press to go directly to the
Schedule area.
Press to display extended
information for the current
program.
INFO
ENTER
Press to confirm a selection
or to leave the GUIDE
Plus+ screen.
4 Information box – Shows short
program descriptions or help menus.
5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various
areas of the GUIDE Plus+ system.
6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for
Number
buttons
Use for numeric entry.
the next seven days by channel and time.
ꢀPREV / ꢁ Press to select the previous/
NEXT
next page of information (in
the grid, for example).
ꢂ / ꢃ
Press to select the previous/
next day.
45
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
One-Button-Record
Lock / Unlock video window
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system,
the channel you were watching remains
visible in the video window. The date stamp
above the window lets you know the
channel, date and time.
The RED Action button (Record) is visible
anytime you can highlight a program title,
including from the Grid, after a search, or in
your recommendations in the My TV area.
The program name, date, channel, recording
start and end times are all set automatically
when you set a timer recording using One-
Button-Record.
The default setting for this window is
‘locked’, as indicated by a closed padlock
icon above the video window. When locked,
the video window always shows the channel
you were previously watching as you move
up and down through the listings grid.
If you need to, you can edit the settings at
any time before the recording is due to start
(see Editing a scheduled recording on
page 50).
If you prefer, you can unlock the video
window so that as you highlight different
channels in the listings grid, that channel is
shown in the video window.
1
Highlight a program title.
1
Highlight a channel logo.
Channel logos are displayed to the left of
program titles.
2
Press the RED Action button (Record).
The program is now set for recording. When
the program is due to start, the recorder will
switch to the correct channel and start
2
Press the RED Action button (Unlock).
The padlock icon above the video window
becomes unlocked. It remains unlocked for
the remainder of your current TV viewing
session.
1
recording .
• You can also use the ꢀREC button to set
the recording.
If you want to lock the video window again,
follow the same procedure. The RED Action
button will now act as Lock.
• You can review the shows you have set to
record in the Schedule Area (see also
The Schedule Area on page 50).
Note
1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that
may occur in the program broadcast schedules.
46
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
Channel mosaic screen
The Grid Area
You can switch the display style of channels
in the Grid Area, Schedule Area or My TV
Area from a list to a mosaic of channel icons
by pressing the YELLOW Action button.
Select the channel icon you want using the
cursor buttons, then press ENTER to return
to the previous screen on that channel.
The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the
GUIDE Plus+ system and is the first screen
that you see when you press GUIDE. You can
see TV listings for the next seven days,
starting with the current day.
When you highlight a program in the Grid,
you can see information about it in the
Information Box, including title, synopsis,
channel, source, time and length. If there is
an i symbol in the Information Box, it means
that there is an extended synopsis available.
Press the INFO button to see it.
Areas
®
The GUIDE Plus+ system consists of seven
Areas. All Areas can be accessed from the
Menu bar.
In some countries, you can also see a rating
for a particular program (mostly movies).
These ratings are provided by local partners,
such as TV magazines.
• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home
Area. Displays TV listings information for
the next seven days by time and channel.
• Search – Search for TV programs by
category (e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g.,
Football) or keyword.
From the Grid Area you can:
• View and scroll through program listings
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently
showing
• Set a program to record
• Lock or unlock the video window.
• Access Information panels.
• My TV – Set up a profile and receive
recommendations according to your
preferences.
• Schedule – Show all scheduled
recordings.
• Info – Area for additional information,
such as weather (not available in all
regions).
1
Browsing the Grid
Use the following remote buttons to browse
the grid:
• Editor – Change channel settings.
®
• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+
ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ (cursor buttons) – Navigate the
Grid
system.
ꢇ PREV/ꢈ NEXT – Previous / next page
ꢉ/ꢊ – Previous / next day
BLUE Action button – Return to the current
time/date in the Grid.
ENTER – Press on the current selection to
exit the GUIDE Plus+ system and start
watching the program.
Note
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds
while it tunes to the channel. This is normal.
47
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
The Search Area
ENTER
3
Start the search.
From the Search Area you can:
The search results are shown sorted by time
and date.
• Search by category
• Search by subcategory
• Search by keyword
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently
showing
• If no search results are displayed, it
means there are no programs for the
current day that match your search
criteria.
Using My Choice keywords for a search
In addition to the standard categories, you
can also set your own keywords.
• Set a program to record
• Access Information panels.
Searching
You can search for programs by category,
subcategory or by keyword (My Choice).
Categories for searching include Movies
(purple), Sport (green), Children (blue) and
Others (teal). In some countries there is a
further subcategory available called ‘Tip of
the Day’. These are programs recommended
by a local partner, such as a TV magazine.
1
Access My Choice.
1
Select ‘Search’ from the Menu
bar.
2
Select a category and a
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to
subcategory.
add a keyword.
ENTER
3
Enter a keyword to appear in
the menu.
• If you choose All as the subcategory, all
programs in the category you selected
will show up in the search results.
48
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
When you’re finished, press the GREEN
Action button to exit and continue.
Setting up a profile
You can set up a profile with any
combination of up to 16 channels, four
categories and 16 keywords.
ENTER
4
Start the keyword search.
• You can delete or edit keywords using
the RED and GREEN Action buttons.
1
Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to
• When you have set more than two
keywords, an All subcategory
set a profile.
automatically appears which allows you
to search for all your keywords.
My TV Area
The My TV Area allows you to set up a
personal profile. You can define a profile by
channels, themes and/or keywords. As soon
as a personal profile has been set, the
GUIDE Plus+ system continuously scans
the TV listings for the next seven days.
Whenever you access the My TV Area, a list
of programs matching your profile appears.
From the My TV Area you can:
Channels is now highlighted.
• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/
or keyword.
3
To add a channel to your profile,
press the YELLOW Action button.
• Edit and delete profiles.
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently
showing
• Set a program to record
• Access Information panels.
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel
icons and press ENTER. Repeat this step to
add up to 16 channels.
49
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
4
To add a theme to your profile,
The Schedule Area
highlight ‘Themes’ and press the
YELLOW Action button.
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see,
edit and delete scheduled (timer)
recordings.
From the Schedule Area you can:
• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording.
• Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+
recording.
• Set, edit or delete a manual recording.
Editing a scheduled recording
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled
recording, or delete it if you no longer require
it.
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled
Select a theme from the Search Area
categories and press ENTER. Repeat this
step to add up to four categories.
recording.
5
To add a keyword to your profile,
highlight ‘Keywords’ and press the
YELLOW Action button.
• If you only want to edit the recording
quality, frequency, destination, timing or
genre settings, skip to step 6 below.
2
Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).
Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ buttons followed by
ENTER to select characters from the on-
screen keyboard. When you’re finished,
press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
6
Press ENTER to activate your profile.
• You can add up to 16 keywords by
repeating step 5.
• You can edit or delete your profile using
the RED and GREEN Action buttons.
50
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
3
Use the cursor and number buttons
5
6
Highlight the right recording tile.
to edit the recording date, start time, end
time and channel.
Press the RED Action button (Quality)
to change the recording quality.
Use the ꢁ/ꢂbuttons or the number buttons
1
Select from AUTO , XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP
to edit.
or MN (if manual recording is set to On).
Press the GREEN Action button to go to
continue, or the RED Action button to go
back.
7
Press the GREEN Action button
(Frequency) to change the recording
frequency.
4
Enter a name for the scheduled
recording.
Select from the various options for one-time,
daily and weekly recordings.
Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ buttons followed by
ENTER to select characters from the on-
screen keyboard.
After entering the whole name, press the
GREEN Action button to continue.
Note
1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to
HDD.
51
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
8
Press YELLOW Action button
9
Press ꢀ to access the extended
(Destination) to select the recording
destination.
recording options:
• If you want to record to a particular HDD
genre, use the YELLOW Action button
(Genre) to select one.
• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing)
to add extra time to the end of the
1
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto
Replace Recording) .
2
• Auto Replace Recording is only available
as an option with regular daily or weekly
recordings.
recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or VPS/
3
PDC (V–P)).
• Press ꢃ to display the standard
recording options again.
Note
1 DVR-940HX-S: If an external HDD (HDD2) is connected, this can also be selected.
2 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 145) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is
off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not
fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make
the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start,
the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of
the older two programs will be erased.
• DVR-940HX-S: Auto Replace Recording is always to the internal HDD (HDD1).
3 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer
recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch
the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the
recording mode is set to AUTO.
52
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
®
Deleting a scheduled recording
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled
Setting a VIDEO Plus+ recording
1
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
recording.
2
Press the RED Action button (VIDEO
2
Press the RED Action button (Delete).
Plus+).
The scheduled event is deleted.
3
Use the number buttons to enter a
VIDEO Plus+ programming number.
Please enter the PlusCode programming number and press
ENTER to confirm.
• If you live in an area not yet covered by
the GUIDE Plus+ system you may also
have to input a channel number. Follow
the on-screen display to do this.
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
53
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
6
Use the number buttons to enter a
Setting a manual recording
1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
channel number, then press the GREEN
Action button (Next) to confirm.
D.TV 001
2
Press the GREEN Action button
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW
Action button (Mosaic) and use the ꢁ/ꢂ/
ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to select a channel from the
mosaic, followed by ENTER.
(Manual).
3
Use the number and ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ
buttons to enter the recording date, then
press the GREEN Action button (Next).
4
In the same way, enter the recording
start time, followed by the GREEN Action
button (Next) to confirm.
5
Enter the recording end time in the
same way, followed by the GREEN Action
button (Next) to confirm.
54
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
About timer recording
Programming System) and PDC (Program
Delivery Control) systems used by many
analog TV stations to ensure that a timer
recording catches the whole program even
when the program is not running to
schedule. Up to eight timer programs can be
set with VPS/PDC on.
Using the timer recording features you can
program up to 32 timer recordings up to a
month in advance. Timer recording
programs can be set to record just once,
every day, or every week.
You can set the recording quality for your
timer recording in the same way as for a
regular recording, but with the added option
of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on
the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a
blank DVD disc (if recording to the (internal)
HDD).
Important
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are
already 32 timer programs waiting to be
recorded.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or
unfinalized.
• Timer recording will start when the
operation preventing timer recording
has finished.
You can set timer recordings to record to a
recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For
regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer
recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording
1
feature to automatically replace the
previous timer recording with the new one.
Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer
program will be replaced by the next one,
regardless of whether you have watched it
yet or not.
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front
panel display when the timer is active. If
the indicator is blinking it means that
(for a DVD timer recording) there is no
disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not
recordable (for an HDD timer recording
it means that the HDD is not recordable).
DVR-940HX-S: If the timer is set to record
to the external HDD, but the external
HDD is not recordable, the timer
You can also set the recorder so that it will
adjust the recording quality to try and fit the
recording on to the disc if it would not
otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 145 for more on
this).
indicator does not blink to warn of this.
• Approximately two minutes before a
timer recording is set to start, the
recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you
cannot use some functions.
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record
to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD
loaded at the time of the recording, the
Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the program to the
HDD for you. DVR-940HX-S: If the recording
destination is the external HDD but at the
time of recording the external HDD is not
connected, the internal HDD will be used for
the recording. During high-speed copying,
the recording destination may also be
changed automatically.
• The maximum length for timer
recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours.
However, because one title (HDD) is
limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12
hours will be spread over two titles. Note
that there will be a break in the recording
of a few seconds between titles.
Note
55
En
1 DVR-940HX-S: Auto Replace Recording is always to the internal HDD (HDD1).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
• VPS/PDC works only with analog
stations; it does not work with digital TV
stations.
• VPS/PDC may not work with all
broadcast stations in your country/area.
Check with the stations for compatibility.
• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the
morning are used by the GUIDE Plus+
system to download program
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote
control buttons inoperative using the child
lock feature. This is useful when you set a
timer recording and want to make sure that
the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
STANDBY/ON
information. During these times, VPS/
PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/
PDC off if you set a timer recording for
these times.
ꢃ
1
If the recorder is on, switch it
into standby.
ꢅ
2
[Front panel] Press and hold for
three seconds to lock the controls.
Extending a timer recording in
progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time. This can be useful if
a broadcast program overruns, for example.
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK.
If any buttons are pressed on the remote or
front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold ꢅ
STOP on the front panel (while the
recorder is stopped) for three seconds
until the display shows UNLOCK.
Canceling or extending the timer
REC
1
Press and hold for three seconds
during a timer recording.
Recording continues, but the timer indicator
disappears from the front panel display
indicating that the timer has been canceled.
REC
2
Press repeatedly to extend
recording in 30 minute blocks.
Stopping a timer recording
STOP REC
1
2
Press during a timer recording.
ENTER
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
56
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
You can also use the Editor Area if new
channels become available in your area, or if
Frequently Asked Questions
you change from cable to satellite, say, or
move house.
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder
doesn’t start recording!
From the Editor Area you can:
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is
recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on
page 130), and that there are fewer than
99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch
the channel on/off).
• Select a channel source (A.TV, D.TV,
Ext. Rec. 1, Ext. Rec. 2, etc.).
• Enter a channel program number.
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer
program! Why not?
You can’t enter a timer program if the
clock isn’t set.
Switching a channel on/off
You can choose whether or not to display a
channel in the Grid Area by switching the
channel on or off in the Editor Area.
• What happens when two or more timer
programs overlap?
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
Basically, the program with the earlier
recording start time has priority.
However, the recorder will start
recording the program with the later
start time after the earlier program is
finished. If two programs have the same
times (but different channels, for
example), the program set most recently
takes priority.
Name
BBC1
On/Off Source
Prog. No.
001
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
D. TV
BBC2
ITV
CH4
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
CH5
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer
programs that are programmed to start
at the same time, then the program that
actually starts first takes priority.
BBC3
ITV2
E4
UKGOL
2
Highlight the left channel tile of the
The Info Area
channel you want to switch on or off.
This area is reserved for additional
information such as news, weather reports,
stock quotes, and so on, and varies by
region. (Note that this feature is not available
in all countries/regions.)
3
Press the RED Action button to switch
the channel on or off.
The Editor Area
The Editor Area is the central location for you
to manage your channels. Any changes you
make here will affect what is displayed in the
Grid Area. The Editor Area is mainly used
when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make any manual changes as necessary.
57
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
Changing the source and program
number
The Setup Area
The Setup Area is where you can set up the
GUIDE Plus+ system for your particular
region, TV reception conditions, and so on.
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+
setup
1
Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.
Prog. No.
001
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
Name
BBC1
BBC2
ITV
CH4
CH5
BBC3
ITV2
E4
On/Off Source
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen.
UKGOL
Basic Setup
Host Channel Setup
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
2
Highlight the right channel tile of the
channel you want to make a change to.
3
Press the RED Action button to
change the channel source, or the GREEN
Action button to enter a program
number.
2
Highlight the part you want to
change.
Each press of the RED Action button
changes the channel source (A.TV, D.TV,
Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a program number,
use the number buttons to enter a program
number then press ENTER (When set to
A.TV or D.TV, make sure that the program
number matches the preset number of this
recorder for what you want to record).
You can change the Language, Country,
1
Postal Code and the External Receiver
settings.
3
Press ENTER to confirm.
Note
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information.
This can take up to 24 hours.
58
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
Manual Host Channel setup
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting
The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically
identify your Host Channel as soon as the
recorder is put into standby for the first time.
See the table on page 42 for a list of all the
European Host Channels.
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a
complete list please consult the GUIDE
Plus+ website at:
If you know your Host Channel details
(source and program number) or if the
automatic identification did not provide the
expected result, you can identify your Host
Channel manually. Select Host Channel
Setup in the Setup area and follow the
instructions on the TV. Select the correct
source (e.g., internal tuner or external
receiver) and enter the respective program
number (e.g., if you have to press 9 on the
remote to watch your Host Channel, enter 9
as the program number). When you next
switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE
Plus+ system will complete the Host
Channel setup.
www.europe.guideplus.com
FAQ
• When I tried setting up my external
receiver I could not get any of the
attempts to work, what should I do?
A: There could be several reasons why
your external receiver could not be
controlled.
– The connections could be wrong. Make
sure that the G-LINK cable is connected
to the G-LINK connector on the recorder
and the IR blaster is in front of the
external receiver, pointing towards the
IR receiver of your external receiver. See
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver on page 19.
You can reset the Host Channel settings at
any time back to the default setting of
automatic. Please be aware that resetting
the Host Channel will erase all TV listings
data.
– The code that is listed under your
brand could be wrong. Please try other
codes for your brand under satellite,
cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area
and choose one of the three options
(cable, satellite or terrestrial) that you
have not already tried. Follow the on-
screen prompts to make sure that the
GUIDE Plus+ system can change
channels on your external receiver. If it
does not work, repeat the process,
choosing different reception and
external receiver combinations until you
have tried all the codes for your brand of
receiver that are already in the GUIDE
Plus+ system. If it still does not work,
see below on how to receive new codes
overnight.
– The unit has not yet received new
codes. The nightly data downloads
frequently include new codes for
controlling external receivers. Please
tune your external receiver to your local
59
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
host channel and leave it on overnight.
Switch this recorder into standby. The
next morning, please perform the GUIDE
Plus+ setup again to see if your external
receiver can now be controlled.
terrestrial or cable connection only to
receive data this way. It is important that
you identify your host channel correctly
in the Editor Area.
• After I performed the initial set-up I found
that the line-up for all the channels
received via the external set top box is
incorrect. How do I correct this?
– The external receiver that you use is
currently not supported. If, after leaving
your external receiver on overnight, and
doing the Reception and External
Receiver Setup again, it still does not
respond, please call Customer Support
to report your brand and model.
You can change the line-up in the editor
according to your preferences. Access
the Editor Area. Select the channels that
you would like to change. Change the
source and preset number according to
your preferences.
• My external receiver was successfully
setup. However I have found that when
the GUIDE Plus+ system has to change
to a channel with a 3-digit program
number in the external receiver's preset, it
does not work. It looks like the GUIDE
Plus+ system can only send two digits.
• I performed the set-up but after many
hours I still have a blank EPG what is
going wrong?
There are several possibilities:
– Connections are wrong. See
Connecting up on page 14 to double
check everything.
With the number of channels
increasing, the number of digits has
increased as well. While older boxes use
only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4.
It is possible that you selected an older
code for your brand during set-up.
Please access the Setup Area, select
External Receiver and repeat the setup
for your brand (Note: Every time you see
the on-screen question about whether
the receiver has changed to a certain
channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has
sent a different code). Try all the different
codes until your GUIDE Plus+ system
can control your external receiver
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was
completed incorrectly. Try setting it up
again (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+®
system on page 40).
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the
recorder has not been connected for
enough time to receive the TV listings
data. Leave the recorder in standby
overnight.
– For external receiver users only: The
connections and setup are OK, but the
external receiver was not tuned to the
correct host channel. Check the list of
host channels (see step 5 of Setting up
the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 40)
and leave the recorder in standby and
the external receiver on overnight tuned
to the correct host channel.
correctly. If you have no success, try to
receive new codes overnight.
• I used to receive data through my
terrestrial antenna or analog cable
without a set-top box. Now, I have
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to
digital cable with external receiver. What
should I do to receive data for the GUIDE
Plus+ system?
– You live in a country/region where the
GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet available.
Check the list of countries to see if you
are in a region that is supported.
You can try to receive your host channel
through your new reception method. If
you have problems to receive data we
recommend that you keep your analog
60
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic program guide
05
• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red
Action button) to set a recording, but I
recorded the wrong channel.
• The automatic Host Channel search
failed or the GUIDE Plus+ system
identified the wrong Host Channel for my
region.
If the channel to be recorded is received
via the external receiver first make sure
that the external receiver was left
switched on. Next, in the Editor Area,
make sure that the channel to be
recorded is correctly set: Access the
Editor Area. Check the source and
program number of the channel that you
wanted to record. Change the source
and preset numbers if incorrect.
You can identify your Host Channel
manually. See Manual Host Channel
setup on page 59 for how to do this.
If you are recording from the recorder’s
internal tuner (the A.TV or D.TV
setting), make sure that the program
number is the same as the preset
number set on this recorder. If they are
different, go to the Editor Area and
change the program number to match
the recorder’s preset number.
• The TV listings information doesn’t
update.
The latest TV listings information is
automatically downloaded by the
recorder overnight. This only happens if
the recorder is in standby; if the recorder
is left on, it will not download. When not
using the recorder, please switch it into
standby.
Data downloads can take several hours.
The front panel display shows EPG when
downloading. If you switch the recorder
on while EPG is displayed, the download
will be canceled.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system is not
supported in my area, but when I switch
the recorder into standby, after a while the
front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop
this from happening?
If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not
supported in your area, please do not set
the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+
setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+®
system on page 40). When the GUIDE
Plus+ service starts in your area, please
set the postal code again.
61
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
06
Using the digital electronic program guide
Chapter 6
Using the digital electronic
program guide
General Program List
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type
Select setting made in the Setup Navigator (or
the Initial Setup menu) is set to Digital EPG.
D007
The Digital EPG system
The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled
digital TV programs and detailed information
about individual programs. It also allows you
easily to select and tune to a particular
1
1
Appears when the schedule table can be
program.
scrolled forward or backward
The Digital EPG screen consists of Program
Information, Channel List and General
Program List. This section describes
information displayed in the schedule and
information windows.
2
3
4
Time schedule
Channel list
Highlights the currently selected
channel
Note that the recorder’s clock must be set to
the correct time and date to ensure all
relevant EPG information is displayed.
5
Indicates the program set for recording
6
Appears when other programs (often
short ones) have been scheduled for the
same period
7
8
Program title
Time dividers
• The general program list may show
sections whose bottom right corners
have been folded. This indicates that
other programs have been scheduled for
that period. To view the title of such a
program and related information,
highlight a folded section, and then
press ꢃ/ꢀ.
Note
62
En
1 EPG information is only viewable for D.TV programs that provide EPG information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the digital electronic program guide
06
• Press ꢇ PREV/ꢈ NEXT to skip to
the next or previous channel list page.
Program information
• Information about the selected program
1
appears in the information window.
D007
• To watch a program currently on air,
select the program (then press ENTER).
1
2
3
4
Channel number
• You can check information about
programs scheduled up to 1 week
ahead, depending on conditions.
• Depending on conditions, it may take
some time to acquire EPG data.
Station name
Program title
Appear when other programs have been
scheduled for the same period
INFO
3
Press to view more information
5
6
Program schedule
Program genre
about the selected program.
Detailed information appears in the
schedule window.
Using the Digital EPG
If the screen contains further information,
More ... is displayed.
Using the Digital EPG you can check the
schedule of digital TV programs, view
information about desired programs, and/or
select programs.
• To quit the display of detailed
information, press INFO again (or
RETURN/EXIT).
D007
13:40 -14:05
************
*************
**************************
GUIDE
1
Press to display the Digital EPG
screen.
The EPG screen updates automatically if the
EPG data is acquired successfully. If not, the
Digital EPG screen shows a blank image.
More...
2
Select a TV program.
GUIDE
4
Press to exit the Digital EPG
screen.
D007
Note
63
En
1 The general program list does not show programs that have already finished.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
06
Using the digital electronic program guide
Setting timer programs
Other useful EPG functions
Using the Digital EPG, it’s easy to set digital
TV programs for recording.
EPG Jump
1
Press GREEN when the Digital EPG
GUIDE
1
Press to display the Digital EPG
screen (Program List, Detailed
information or Search Result) is
displayed.
screen.
ENTER
2
Select a program.
• Select a program currently on-air: press
ENTER to close the Digital EPG screen
watch the channel immediately, or press
RED to set the program for recording
immediately.
• Select a program not yet started then
press ENTER or RED to set the program
for recording.
2
In the ‘Date’ field select a date
(within one week) to jump to.
Date
Time
Mon.13.Sep
14:00
Jump
Cancel
D007
3
In the ‘Time’ field select a time
of the day (0:00 to 23:00) to jump to.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Jump’.
The Program List for the specified day and
time is displayed.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
D007
A red clock icon appears for the program.
GUIDE
4
Press to exit the Digital EPG
screen.
64
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the digital electronic program guide
06
EPG Search
1
Press YELLOW when the EPG screen
(Program List, Detailed information or
Search Result) is displayed.
2
In the ‘Date’ field select a date
(within one week) to search in.
Date
Sun.12.Sep
12:00
Time
Genre
Select
0/16
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search
Cancel
3
In the ‘Time’ field select the
time of day (0:00 to 23:00) to search in.
4
In the ‘Genre’ field, select the
genre to search for.
You can search for multiple genres by
pressing ENTER after each genre.
ENTER
5
6
Select ‘OK’.
ENTER
Select ‘Search’.
The results of your search are displayed.
65
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Recording
CRhaepcteor 7rding
About DVD recording
Important
• The table below shows the maximum
number of titles recordable per disc and
the maximum number of chapters per
title:
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-
RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R
DL and DVD+R DL media.
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized
for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each
has its advantages, and it depends on what
you want to do with the recording which
mode you choose.
Max.
chapters
(per title)
Disc type/rec.
format
Max. titles
(per disc)
DVD-R/-RW
Video mode
99
99
49
99
If you want to edit your recordings in any
significant way, VR mode offers greater
possibilities for cutting, copying, and
changing the way the video is presented.
*1
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
VR mode
999
*2
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to
editing, but it has the advantage that it is
compatible with standard DVD players
DVD+R/+RW
99
*1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.
1
*2
(many of which won’t play VR mode discs ).
A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.
Once a disc is initialized for a particular
mode, all recording on that disc will be in
that mode.
• This recorder cannot play or record
unfinalized Video mode and DVD+R
discs recorded on another recorder.
DVD+RW discs recorded on another
recorder are playable on this recorder
but are not recordable.
• The maximum continuous recording
time for one title is eight hours when
using a DVD+R/+RW disc.
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR
mode recording.
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR
mode recording.
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW
disc, the total number of recordable
titles remaining may not increase.
• Although this recorder can record PAL,
SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix
multiple TV line systems on one disc. A
disc can contain PAL and SECAM
recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See
also Additional information about the TV
system settings on page 150.
Note
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating
instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information.
66
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on
a disc can affect playback and/or
recording performance. Please take
proper care of your discs.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means
that you can store many hours of video on it,
even using the higher quality recording
modes.
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for
recording failure due to power cuts,
defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
• See also Disc / content format playback
compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc
compatibility information.
Important
• The maximum number of titles/chapters
per title that can be recorded on the
1
HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No
more recording is possible on the HDD
after the maximum number of titles has
been reached.
• The maximum continuous recording
time for one title is 12 hours.
• It is possible to record both PAL and
NTSC titles on the HDD. Before
recording, you need to make sure that
the Input Line System setting (page 150)
matches the TV line system of the source
you’re recording.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
discs
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is
generally the same as recording to regular
single-layer discs; however, please note the
following points:
• When the recorder switches from the
first layer to the second during recording
a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new
title is automatically started on the new
layer.
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a
DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th
title is being recorded when the layer is
switched, recording will stop.
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a
DVD+R DL disc.
• You cannot play, record additional
material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or
DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded
on but not yet finalized on another DVD
recorder.
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose
to record in one of two formats. Set the
format from the HDD Recording Format
item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 146).
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed
copying from HDD to Video mode DVD-R/-
RW or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When
recording a bilingual broadcast, set which
channel you want to record from the Initial
Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on
page 142).
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off, high-speed copying isn’t possible.
However, both channels of bilingual
broadcasts are recorded and you can switch
the audio on playback.
About HDD recording
Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is
very flexible; you have the full choice of
recording quality options, including manual
mode, and of course you can record, erase
and re-record as many times as you like.
Note
67
En
1 DVR-940HX-S only: The same limits apply to the external HDD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Recording
CPRM
Recorded audio
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling
system developed for the recording of ‘copy
once’ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for
Content Protection for Recordable Media.
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is
recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format
(only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby
Digital 5.1 recording is not possible). When
set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high
quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which
means that you can record copy-once
broadcast programs, but you cannot then
make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-
compatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0 / 8x or higher) or
DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted
in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you
are recording to Video mode DVD-R/-RW,
DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD
Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or
on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual
Recording setting (page 142) to select the
A/L or B/R audio channel to record before
recording starts. In other cases, both
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played
on players that are specifically compatible
with CPRM.
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be
recorded and you can switch on playback.
Recording equipment and
copyright
Recording equipment should be used only
for lawful copying and you are advised to
check carefully what is lawful copying in the
country in which you are making a copy.
Copying of copyright material such as films
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a
legal exception or consented to by the
rightowners.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Restrictions on video
recording
You cannot record copy-protected video
using this recorder. Copy-protected video
includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite
broadcasts. If copy-protected material is
encountered during a recording, recording
will pause automatically and an error
message will be displayed on-screen.
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be
recorded to HDD, CPRM-compatible VR
mode DVD-R/-RW (see below), or DVD-RAM.
When recording a TV broadcast or through
an external input, you can display copy
control information on screen. (see
Displaying disc information on-screen on
page 93).
68
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
Using the built-in A.TV and
D.TV tuners
Tip
• When changing terrestrial digital
broadcast channels, channels with a low
signal strength may result in a black
screen being displayed.
• For other channels, it may take a short
while for the channel picture to appear,
and/or for the channel number to
appear.
Switching between A.TV and D.TV
tuners
A.TV/D.TV
•
•
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S:
SHIFT
A.TV/D.TV
• In both of the above cases, some
improvement may be possible by
adjusting the antenna.
+
Press to switch between D.TV (digital)
and A.TV (analog).
Using the D.TV Channel List
Changing channels
When in D.TV mode, you can call up the on-
screen Channel List anytime by pressing
ENTER. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ buttons to select a
channel, then press ENTER to switch to that
There are a number of ways to select analog
1
and digital TV channels. Note that you can’t
change the TV channel during playback,
recording or during recording standby.
1
channel.
CHANNEL
+
D001
D002
D003
D004
D005
D006
************
************
******
–
CHANNEL
• DVR-940HX-S:
Smart Jog
PREV
NEXT
************
****
• DVR-545HX-S:
CHANNEL +/–
CHANNEL
******
buttons
•
Number buttons
For example, to select channel 4 (digital
channel D004), press 4 then ENTER; for
channel 34 (digital channel D034), press
2
3, 4, ENTER.
• CH +/– buttons on the front panel
• For D.TV channels only, you can also use
the Channel List—see below.
Note
1 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.
• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed
for 3 minutes.
69
En
2 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Recording
Displaying a channel banner
A channel banner shows program titles,
start and end times of the current program
and other channel information. The
information is updated every minute.
Changing D.TV audio languages
AUDIO
•
DVR-940HX-S:
SHIFT
AUDIO
•
DVR-545HX-S:
+
INFO
Press to display the current audio
language. Press repeatedly to change it
to other available languages.
•
Press to display the channel
banner for the current channel.
D001
Wed.30.Apr 12:46
************
Changing D.TV subtitle languages
Now
Next
11:30-12:00
12:00 - 12:30
********************
*************
SUBTITLE
•
•
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S:
• Use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to display the
channel banner for other channels. To
switch to the displayed banner’s
channel, press ENTER.
SHIFT
SUBTITLE
+
Press to display the current subtitle
language. Press repeatedly to change it
to other available languages.
• The channel banner displays the
Subtitles ( ) and MHEG ( ) icon if that
channel supports the MHEG application
(see Using the MHEG application
Using the MHEG application
(UK only)
1
below).
• To see more detailed channel
information, press INFO again.
Some stations bring you programs with the
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert
Group) application encoded, letting you
2
3
Now
11:30-12:00
************************
experience D.TV interactively.
The channel banner displays an icon ( ) to
indicate that the MHEG application can be
run.
More...
Use the ꢁ/ꢂ buttons to display
information about previous and
following programs. Use the ꢃ/ꢀ
buttons to see information about other
channels.
TEXT
•
DVR-940HX-S:
SHIFT
DISPLAY
TEXT
+
•
DVR-545HX-S:
• If there is still more information to be
displayed, More ... is displayed; press
the BLUE button to see the extra
information.
4
Press to start the MHEG application.
• You can also use any of the colour
buttons.
• Press TEXT (DVR-940HX-S) or SHIFT +
DISPLAY/TEXT (DVR-545HX-S) to quit
the MHEG application.
• To hide the channel banner, press
RETURN.
Note
1 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent
in error.
2 Not all channels supply more detailed information.
3 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be
recorded. To avoid this, quit the application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG
application while recording is in progress.
70
En
4 This function is not available when subtitle display is active.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
Changing A.TV audio channels
You can change the audio channel of the
broadcast or external input signal.
Note
• When recording to the HDD with HDD
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM
setting, only one channel of a bilingual
broadcast is recorded. In this case,
decide which language you want to
record before recording by setting the
Bilingual Recording setting (see
AUDIO
•
•
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S:
SHIFT
AUDIO
+
Press to change the audio type.
The current audio channel is displayed on-
screen.
Bilingual Recording on page 142).
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM
Select on page 142) is set to NICAM and
you are watching a NICAM broadcast,
you can switch between NICAM and
Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
Switching between TV and DVD
When the recorder is stopped or recording
you can choose whether to have the audio/
video from the built-in TV tuner (or external
input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’), or
watch the channel that the TV is currently set
to (‘TV mode’).
NICAM
Regular
During playback or when a menu is being
displayed on-screen, the sound and video is
always routed to your TV and is unaffected by
the TV/DVD mode setting.
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you
can also select the language.
NICAM A
Regular
NICAM B
Note that the recorder must be connected to
your TV using a SCART cable to be able to
use this feature.
NICAM A+B
• You can also select the language for a
non-NICAM bilingual broadcast.
TV/DVD
•
Switch between TV mode and
A (L)
B (R)
DVD mode.
A + B (L+R)
• When watching a recording made from
an external input with Bilingual
recording selected (see External Audio
on page 142), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both
(L+R).
L
R
L+R
71
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Recording
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest
video quality but gives about ten hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
Setting the picture quality/
recording time
1
• MN1 to MN32 / LPCM – Manual /
Linear PCM (available only when manual
recording is on)
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Before starting a recording, you will usually
want to set the picture quality/recording
time. There are six standard settings
available, which allow you to choose a
balance between picture quality and
recording time.
The setting is indicated in the front panel
display, and shown on-screen together with
the recording time for a blank recordable
disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for
that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On
Screen Display setting (see On Screen
Display on page 149) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
When Manual Recording is set to On (see
Manual Recording on page 145), a further
option will be available (MN1 to MN32 or
LPCM, depending on what you set).
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the
longest recording time available. If you
select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording
mode will automatically revert to SLP.
REC MODE
•
•
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S:
REC MODE
SHIFT
+
Press repeatedly to select the recording
quality.
• XP – High quality setting, gives about
one hour of recording time on a DVD
disc.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality,
used for most applications, gives about
two hours of recording time on a DVD.
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than
SP, but doubles the recording time on a
DVD to about four hours.
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than
LP, but gives about six hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality
than EP, but gives about eight hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
Note
1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broad-
cast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 142).
72
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
• While the recorder is stopped, you can
also use the number buttons on the
remote to select the channel (For
Basic recording from the TV
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also
use the CH +/– buttons on the front
panel to select the channel number.
Basic recording from the TV involves just
setting the channel to record, choosing
whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and
selecting the recording quality.
REC MODE
4
5
DVR-940HX-S:
HDD/DVD
REC MODE
SHIFT
1
DVR-545HX-S:
+
1
Select the HDD or DVD for
Set the picture quality/recording
time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
recording.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a
recordable disc (if you load a new blank
DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R
or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must
initialize it before proceeding (see
Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 80).
time on page 72 for detailed instructions.
AUDIO
DVR-940HX-S:
SHIFT
AUDIO
+
DVR-545HX-S:
If you’re recording from the A.TV
tuner, select the audio channel to
record.
A.TV/D.TV
2
3
DVR-940HX-S:
See Changing A.TV audio channels on
page 71 for more on this.
SHIFT
A.TV/D.TV
DVR-545HX-S:
Press to switch between D.TV
(digital) and A.TV (analog).
+
• When recording in VR mode, if a
broadcast is bilingual, both audio
channels are recorded, allowing you to
switch the audio channel on playback.
The only exception to this is when the
picture quality is set to LPCM, in which
case you do need to select the audio
channel before recording.
CHANNEL
+
–
CHANNEL
DVR-940HX-S:
PREV
NEXT
DVR-545HX-S:
Select a TV channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel
CHANNEL
AUDIO
6
DVR-940HX-S:
SHIFT
AUDIO
number, or channel name if it’s available:
+
DVR-545HX-S:
If you’re recording from the D.TV
tuner, select the audio language to
record.
A.TV Channel preset
• You may also be able to set which
subtitle language to record; use
SUBTITLE (DVR-940HX-S) or SHIFT +
SUBTITLE (DVR-545HX-S) to select.
Note
73
En
1 DVR-940HX-S only: If the external HDD is connected and available for recording, you can select it here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Recording
REC
Tip
7
Start recording.
• During recording you can turn on/off the
SCART loop through function. During
recording, press the front panel CH +
button to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on), or CH – to switch to SCART
NORM (loop through off). Loop through
is automatically reset to off after
recording has finished. Note that you
can’t switch loop through on if recording
from the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) or
AV1(RGB)-TV connectors.
If you want to set a recording end time, press
the ꢀ REC button repeatedly. The recording
time increases in 30 minute increments, up
to a maximum of six hours. The time the
recording will end is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display. When the recording
ends, the recorder automatically switches
into standby if no other operation is being
performed.
• To cancel the set recording time, press
ꢀ REC.
• If you want to pause recording at any
1
time , press ꢆ PAUSE. Press again to
restart the recording (If recording to the
HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new
chapter is started after recording
restarts).
STOP REC
8
Press to stop recording.
• If you set the recording time in the
previous step, you can still stop the
recording anytime by pressing ꢀSTOP
REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when
there is no more space on the HDD/
DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording
(whichever is sooner).
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer
programs that are programmed to start
at the same time, then the program that
actually starts first takes priority.
Note
74
En
1 Except during Chase Play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Pause Live TV
HDD
07
1
Connect this recorder to your TV with
a SCART cable.
2
3
Press HOME MENU.
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’
The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively
pause a TV program you’re watching. When
you’re ready to resume watching, just press
the ꢀ PLAY button.
> ‘Auto Channel Setting’ > ‘Download
from TV’.
• If the Download from TV option appears
grayed out, check the connections to
your TV and try again.
• Depending on your TV, you might have to
switch off and unplug it for a few
moments before plugging it back in and
switching on.
Setting up for Pause Live TV
You can use the Pause Live TV feature with
an AV Link-compatible TV connected using a
SCART cable (see TV tuner setup for Pause
Live TV below), or using this recorder’s
internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s
internal tuner for Pause Live TV below).
4
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Using the recorder’s internal tuner for
Pause Live TV
TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV
If you haven’t connected to your TV using a
SCART cable (or your TV is not compatible
with AV Link) you can use the recorder’s
internal tuner for the Pause Live TV.
To use this feature with an external TV tuner,
the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable, and the AV Link setting
(page 150) should be set to This Recorder
Only. See also Pause Live TV on page 138 for
more on this.
1
1
Press HOME MENU.
2
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Basic’ > ‘Pause
In order to use Pause Live TV, make the
following connections and settings.
Live TV’ > ‘Recorder’s Tuner’.
See Pause Live TV on page 138 to do this.
• Pause Live TV will not work as expected
when watching TV via an external
component such as a VCR or digital
tuner. It only works with the channel
selected on the TV.
You can record the channel selected on the
recorder.
Important
• Pause Live TV only works with the built-in
A.TV (analog) tuner. It does not work with
the D.TV tuner or the external inputs.
Make sure the Auto Channel Setting is
set to Download from TV (see Auto
Channel Setting on page 140).
Note
1 • Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you’re not sure.
• This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came
with your TV if you’re unsure about your TV’s compatibility with this feature.
75
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Recording
Using Pause Live TV
Tip
PAUSE
LIVE TV
• When the Pause Live TV setting (see
page 138) is set to TV’s Tuner, you can
press PAUSE LIVE TV while the recorder
is in standby to switch on and
immediately start recording. When set to
Recorder’s Tuner, it is not possible to
use the Pause Live TV feature from
standby.
• After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will
take at least 10 seconds for the picture to
change (during this time, all controls
except the power button are inoperative).
(Note that startup from standby is not
possible if you have selected Recorder’s
Tuner in Pause Live TV on page 138.)
• Please note that you can’t record from
another component (VCR, etc.) that is
connected by a SCART cable to the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the Pause Live TV feature.
1
Start recording the current TV
channel.
Recording continues with playback paused.
• Note that it may take up to 10 seconds
for recording to start.
2
Press to start playback.
You can also use the scan buttons (ꢉ/
ꢊ), pause (ꢆ PAUSE) and stop (ꢅ
STOP)—all without affecting the recording.
STOP REC
3
Press to stop the recording.
The operation is slightly different depending
on the viewing source. See the Operation
table below for details.
Operation table
TV/DVD
mode of DVR source
DVR
Pause Live TV
function button
Viewing source
Condition
TV built-in analog
tuner
TV
–
Pause Live TV
Preset channel of DVR and TV are
matched after downloading from TV
Direct TV
recording*1
Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT
matched after downloading from TV.
Record TV program that you’re watching.
TV built-in digital
tuner
TV
–
–
Direct TV
recording*1
Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be
shared by DVR even after Download from
TV. Record TV program that you’re
watching.
External input of TV
TV
Direct TV
Record TV program that you’re watching.
recording*1
DVR built-in analog
tuner
DVD
DVD
DVR built-in Pause Live TV
analog tuner
DVR built-in digital
tuner
DVR built-in Pause Live TV
digital tuner
*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording.
76
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
Also, during simultaneous recording
and playback, if the TV line system of the
playback track/title changes then
playback will automatically stop.
Simultaneous recording and
playback (Chase Play)
HDD
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording
that is still in progress from the start, without
having to wait until the recording has
finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the
recording).
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching
the recording in progress. You can watch
anything else already on the HDD (or on a
DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen
(see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD on page 86).
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the
recording input.
•
Press during recording to start
playback from the beginning of the
1
current recording .
DISC
NAVIGATOR
•
Press during recording to select
another title to play.
You can use all the usual playback controls,
such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and
skip.
• To stop playback, press ꢅ STOP
(recording will continue).
• To stop recording, press ꢀSTOP REC
(playback will continue).
• During recording or in timer recording
standby, you can’t play an HDD title,
DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the
Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title
(see also Additional information about
the TV system settings on page 150).
Note
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work
while copying or backing up.
77
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Recording
HDD/DVD
Recording from an external
component
4
Select the HDD or DVD for
recording.
• If you have the DVR-940HX-S with a
connected external HDD, you can also
select the external HDD for recording.
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can record from an external component,
such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to
one of the recorder’s external inputs.
REC
5
Press to start recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using
Copy Guard, you will not be able to
record it. See Restrictions on video
recording on page 68 for more details.
1
Make sure that the component you
want to record from is connected
properly to the DVD recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for
connection options.
Playing your recordings on
other DVD players
INPUT SELECT
2
Press repeatedly to select one of
the external inputs to record from.
The current input is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display:
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
1
Most regular DVD players can play finalized
discs recorded in Video mode and DVD+R
discs. A number of players (including many
Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW
discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not.
Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R
discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and
DVD recorders may be able to (finalization
might be necessary). Check the manual that
came with the player to check what kinds of
discs it will play.
• AV2/L1 – Input 1
• L2 – Input 2 (front panel)
• L3 – Input 3
Check that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Bilingual Recording
are as you want them (see Audio In on
page 142).
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed
or stretched), adjust on the source
component or your TV before recording.
• To watch video coming in via the DV
input (front panel), select DV > DV
Video Playback from the Home Menu
(see also Playing from a DV camcorder on
page 94).
When you finalize a Video mode or DVD+R
disc, a title menu is created from which you
can select titles when you play the disc.
There are a number of different styles of title
menu to choose from to suit the content of
the disc.
REC MODE
3
DVR-940HX-S:
All the title menus are navigated in the usual
way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to
display the menu, then using the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/
ꢀ followed by ENTER to select titles and
start playback.
REC MODE
SHIFT
DVR-545HX-S:
+
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 72 for detailed information.
Note
78
En
1 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 142).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.
Finalizing a disc
Make sure that the recorder is stopped
before proceeding.
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
2
HOME MENU
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc
so that it can be played on a regular DVD
player or computer equipped with a suitable
Home Menu.
1
DVD-ROM drive.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ >
Note that the disc name will appear in the
title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure
the disc name is as you want it before you
finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc,
see Input Disc Name on page 130 before
starting the steps below.
‘Next Screen’.
Disc Setup
Next Screen
Start
Basic
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need
finalizing. However, if you want a title menu
to appear when you play the disc, then you
will need to finalize. When using a
DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even
after finalizing. although the title menu will
disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc
again to generate a new title menu.
ENTER
4
For Video mode and DVD+R/
+RW discs only, select a title menu style,
then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or
‘No’ to cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that
appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for
a DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD
player.
Important
• Once you’ve finalized a Video mode or
DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record
anything else on that disc. However, the
finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 131
for how to do this.
Finalize
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-
R DL) disc can still be recorded and
edited on this recorder even after
finalizing.
• Video mode DVD-R DL discs and
DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in
order to play in other recorders/players.
Note however that some recorders/
players will not play even finalized dual-
layer discs.
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the
Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not
support this feature. These discs will
have only a text title menu when finalized
on this recorder.
Note
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize
the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 150 for how to change the recorder’s
setting.
79
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Recording
5
The recorder will now start finalizing
Important
the disc.
During finalization:
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or
DVD-RAM disc will erase everything
recorded on it. Make sure there is
nothing on the disc that you want to
keep!
• You may not be able to re-initialize a
DVD-RW disc in a different format if it
was originally initialized on an older DVD
recorder.
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW
or DVD+R/+RW disc is going to take
more than around four minutes, you can
press ENTER to cancel. Around four
minutes before completion, the option to
cancel disappears.
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR
mode DVD-R disc.
• Once initialized for VR mode recording,
you can’t re-initialize a DVD-R back to
Video mode.
• How long finalization takes depends on
the type of disc, how much is recorded
on the disc and the number of titles on
the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can
take up to one hour to finalize. Video
mode DVD-R/-RW and DVD+R/+RW
discs can take up to 20 minutes.
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video
Initializing recordable DVD
discs
Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize
DVD+RW’.
Disc Setup
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Start
Start
Start
Basic
VR Mode
Initialize
Finalize
Video Mode
Initialize DVD+RW
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either
Video mode recording or VR mode
recording.
Optimize HDD
1
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or
DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for
recording automatically. By default, blank
DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on
page 146 if you want to change the default to
Video mode.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the
disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take
up to 1 hour).
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode
recordings out of the box; if you want to use
a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must
initialize it before recording anything on the
disc.
Initializing Disc
Pr 1
1 min left
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be
initialized in order to erase the contents of
the disc.
Note
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize
it for Video mode recording.
80
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
08
CPhlaapteyr b8 ack
Introduction
Basic playback
Most of the features described in this
chapter make use of on-screen displays.
Navigate these using the cursor buttons and
ENTER. To go back one level from any
screen, use the RETURN/EXIT button.
A L L
This section shows you how to use your
recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD,
etc.), and for playback of video from the
HDD.
Remember also that the button guide at the
bottom of every screen shows which buttons
do what.
Important
Many of the functions covered in this
chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video
CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs
and CDs, although the exact operation of
some varies slightly with the kind of disc
loaded.
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’
means any kind of playable or recordable
DVD. If a function is specific to a
particular kind of DVD disc, it is
specified.
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and
DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain
playback controls to operate at certain
points in the disc. This is not a
malfunction.
• Many functions are not available when a
Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start
playback from the Disc Navigator screen
for non-PBC playback (see Using the
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs
on page 87).
HDD/DVD
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files,
see The PhotoViewer on page 122.
1
1
Select the HDD or DVD for
playback.
• If playing video from the HDD, skip to
step 3 below.
• Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.
OPEN/CLOSE
2
[Front panel] Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up,
using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if
you’re loading a double-sided DVD-Video
disc, load it with the side you want to play
face down).
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD,
please first read the note on page 84.
Note
81
En
1 DVR-940HX-S: If the external HDD is connected and available for playing, you can select it here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Playback
Playing DVD discs
3
Start playback.
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD
discs.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video
CD, a disc menu may appear when you
start playback. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ
buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc
menus, and the number buttons and
ENTER for Video CD menus.
• When playing video from the HDD,
playback will automatically stop after the
end of a title is reached.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-
screen, playback starts from
the place last stopped.
Press to stop playback.
STOP
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing ꢄ
PLAY. (Press ꢅ STOP again to
cancel the resume function.)
• There may be a slight pause when
playback switches from the first to the
second layer of a dual-layer disc.
• See the following sections for more
details on playing specific kinds of discs.
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
STOP
4
5
Press to stop playback.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the scan-
ning speed.
When you’ve finished using the
recorder, eject the disc and switch the
recorder back into standby.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next
chapter/title. (During playback
you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
DVD+R/DVD+RW only: ꢇ
PREV may not always skip to
the previous title.
Except VR mode: During play-
back, enter a chapter number
then press ENTER to skip
directly to that chapter within
the currently playing title.
On some discs, you can also
use the number buttons to
select numbered items in the
disc menu.
CLEAR CLEAR
ENTER
VR mode only: During playback,
enter a title number then press
ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a
number entry and start again.
82
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
08
PAUSE
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-940HX-S: Turn the Smart
Jog counter-clockwise for back-
ward skip; turn clockwise for
forward skip.
DVR-545HX-S with DVD-R/-RW,
DVD-RAM only: (Commercial
back/skip) Press to skip back-
ward/forward progressively up
to a maximum of ten minutes
forward or three minutes back.
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
CHANNEL
+
–
CHANNEL
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the scan-
ning speed.
DVR-545HX-S:
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next
chapter/title. (During playback
you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
ꢃ/
/ꢂ
While paused, press and hold
to start slow-motion playback.
Press repeatedly to change the
playback speed.
While paused, press to advance
a single frame in either direc-
tion.
During playback, enter a title
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number
entry and start again.
CLEAR CLEAR
ENTER
TOP MENU
Press to display the menu of a
DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW
discs finalized on this recorder
will display the Disc Navigator.
Press MENU to display the disc
menu.)
MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
DVR-940HX-S:
(Commercial back/skip)
DVR-940HX-S: Turn the Smart
Jog counter-clockwise for back-
ward skip; turn clockwise for
forward skip.
CHANNEL
+
–
CHANNEL
DVR-545HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S: Press to skip
backward/forwardprogressively
up to a maximum of ten min-
utes forward or three minutes
back.
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
Use the cursor buttons to navi-
gate DVD-Video disc menus;
press ENTER to select items.
ENTER
RETURN/EXIT
Press to return to the previous
level of a DVD-Video disc menu.
ꢃ
/
/
ꢂ
While paused, press and hold
to start slow-motion playback.
Press repeatedly to change the
playback speed.
While paused, press to advance
a single frame in either direc-
tion.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback
controls when playing video recorded on the
hard disk (HDD).
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-
screen, playback starts from
the place last stopped. Play-
back automatically stops after
the end of a title is reached.
Press to stop playback.
STOP
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing ꢀ
PLAY. (Press ꢁ STOP again to
cancel the resume function.)
83
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Playback
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for Video CD/Super VCDs.
The table below shows the basic playback
1
controls for audio CDs , and WMA/MP3
files.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC
for short) menus. These discs show PBC in
the display when you load them and display
a menu on-screen from where you can select
Press to start playback.
2
Press to stop playback.
STOP
what to watch.
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is dis-
played on-screen, playback
starts from the place last
stopped.
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Except WMA: Press to start
scanning. Press again to
increase the scanning speed.
(There are two scan speeds; the
current scan speed is shown
on-screen.)
Press to stop playback.
STOP
Video CD only: You can resume
playback from the same point
by pressing ꢀ PLAY. (Press ꢁ
STOP again to cancel the
resume function.)
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next
track (or folder for WMA/MP3
disc). (During playback you can
also use the front panel CH +/–
buttons.)
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the scan-
ning speed.
During playback, enter a track
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number
entry and start again.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next
track.
CLEAR CLEAR
ENTER
When a PBC menu is dis-
played, press to display the pre-
vious/next page. (During
playback you can also use the
front panel CH +/– buttons.)
Note
1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with
a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected
using the
page 92).
AUDIO (DVR-940HX-S) or SHIFT + 4 (DVR-545HX-S) button (see Switching audio channels on
2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not avail-
able. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator
(see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 87).
84
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
08
Playing DivX video files
During playback, enter a track
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for DivX video files.
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number
entry and start again.
While a PBC menu screen is
displayed, use to select num-
bered menu items.
CLEAR CLEAR
ENTER
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-
screen, playback starts from
the place last stopped. Play-
back of titles (DivX files) pro-
ceeds in alphabetical order.
DVR-940HX-S:
Video CD in non-PBC mode only:
DVR-940HX-S: Turn the Smart
Jog counter-clockwise for back-
ward skip; turn clockwise for
forward skip.
DVR-545HX-S: Press to skip
backward/forwardprogressively
up to a maximum of ten min-
utes forward or three minutes
back.
CHANNEL
+
Press to stop playback.
STOP
–
CHANNEL
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing ꢄ
PLAY. (Press ꢅ STOP again to
cancel the resume function.)
DVR-545HX-S:
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the scan-
ning speed.
/ꢎ
While paused, press and hold
to start slow-motion playback.
Press repeatedly to change the
playback speed (forward only).
While paused, press to advance
a single frame (forward only).
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next
title. (During playback you can
also use the front panel CH +/–
buttons.)
RETURN/EXIT
Press to display the disc menu
of a Video CD/Super VCD play-
ing in PBC mode.
/ꢎ
While paused, press to advance
one frame. Press and hold to
start slow motion playback
(press repeatedly to change the
slow motion play speed).
DVR-940HX-S:
Press to display the playback
audio type; press repeatedly to
change the playback audio
type.
AUDIO
AUDIO
DVR-545HX-S:
SHIFT
+
DVR-940HX-S:
Press to display subtitle
information; press repeatedly to
change subtitles.
SUBTITLE
DVR-545HX-S
SHIFT
SUBTITLE
+
85
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Playback
• For HDD recordings, you should be able
to see a thumbnail title digest. If it
doesn’t display, set Set Preview to
Normal. See Set Preview on page 150.
Using the Disc Navigator to
browse the contents of a disc
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the
contents of a disc and start playback.
ENTER
4
Play the highlighted title.
• You can also select Play from the
command menu options.
Using the Disc Navigator with
recordable discs and the HDD
Changing the display style of the
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Disc Navigator
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse
and edit video on recordable DVDs and the
HDD, and to view information on titles.
You can choose to display titles in the Disc
Navigator in various different ways, sorted
alphabetically, by recording date, by genre,
and so on. You can also choose whether to
display four or eight titles on the screen at
the same time.
See also Editing on page 97 for more on
editing recordable discs.
HDD/DVD
1
1
2
Select the HDD or DVD.
1
Display the View Options
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Open the Disc Navigator.
panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
The View Options panel
10Titles
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
23:00 FRI 3/12
Style
4
9
SP
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
Titles
Recent first
All Genres
MENU
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Sort order
7
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
7
SP
9
SP
Recent first
1h00m(1.0G)
MENU
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
All Genres
7
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
• You can also access the Disc Navigator
from the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or
3
Browse the list of titles.
• Use the ꢇ PREV/ꢈ NEXT buttons to
display the previous/next page of titles.
‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the
available view options.
• Style – Select four or eight titles per
• To change the thumbnail picture
displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on
page 102.
screen view
• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent
first), unwatched first, title name or
recording date (oldest first)
• Genre – Display all genres or just a
selected genre
Note
86
En
1 DVR-940HX-S: If the external HDD is connected and available for playing, you can select it here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
08
• For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks
and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you
can switch the playback area between
CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. This can only
be done while the disc is stopped.
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then
press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to
the new display preferences.
Scanning discs
Using the Disc Navigator with
playback-only discs
A L L
(except WMA)
WMA/MP3
DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD
DivX
You can scan discs at various speeds,
1
HOME MENU
1
Display the Home Menu.
forwards or backwards.
1
During playback, start reverse
ENTER
or forward scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD
or WMA/MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC
NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to
the Disc Navigator screen.
2
Press repeatedly to change the
scanning speed.
There are four scanning speeds available
when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX
title. Reverse playback is also possible with
ENTER
2
3
Select what you want to play.
HDD and DVD video.
Depending on the type of disc you have
loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly
different, but they are all navigated in the
same way.
There are two scanning speeds for other
types of disc.
3
Resume normal playback.
The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX
disc. Navigate to the folder, or the track/title
within a folder that you want to play.
Disc Navigator
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
CD
WMA/MP3
Divx
02.Pop
03.Dance
002.Escape
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
Note
1 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs and DivX titles with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
sound on forward SCAN 1 (Linear PCM is output from the coaxial digital output, except during chase playback
and simultaneous recording/playback). No sound is output when using other scan speeds.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the
coaxial digital output during forward SCAN 1).
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD
disc.
2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.
87
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Playback
Playing in slow motion
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
The Play Mode menu
A L L
You can play video at various slow motion
speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be
played in slow motion in either direction,
while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles
can only be played forwards in slow motion.
The Play Mode menu gives you access to
search functions, repeat and program play
functions.
HOME MENU
•
Select ‘Play Mode’ from the
Home Menu.
There is no sound when playing in slow
motion.
• DVR-545HX-S only: You can also access
the Play Mode menu by pressing SHIFT
+ 9.
PAUSE
1
Pause playback.
Play Mode
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
ꢋ/
/ꢎ
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
2
Press and hold to start slow
Program
motion reverse or forward play.
ꢋ/
/ꢎ
3
Press repeatedly to change
the slow motion speed.
The current playback speed is indicated on-
screen.
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press
HOME MENU or SHIFT + 9
(DVR-545HX-S only).
4
Resume normal playback.
Frame advance/frame
reverse
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
You can advance or back up video on a DVD
1
disc or the HDD frame-by-frame.
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles,
you can only use frame advance.
PAUSE
1
Pause playback.
ꢋ/
/ꢎ
2
Back up or advance one
frame with each press.
3
Resume normal playback.
Note
88
En
1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
08
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
A L L
DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX
The Search Mode feature lets you start
The A-B Repeat function allows you to
specify two points (A and B) within a track or
title that form a loop which is played over
playback from a specified point in a disc by
1
time or by title/chapter/folder/track
2
number.
and over.
ENTER
ENTER
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from
1
During playback, select ‘A-B
the Play Mode menu, then choose a
search option.
Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
The available search options depend on the
type of disc.
ENTER
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’
highlighted, press at the point you want
the loop to start.
Play Mode
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
2
Enter a title/chapter/folder/
track number or a search time.
Program
Play Mode
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
ENTER
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted,
press at the point you want the loop to
end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the
start point and plays the loop round and
round.
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25
minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0,
0. For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds
into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode
DVD, or from the HDD, the start and end
points of the loop must be in the same
title.
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for
2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current
track, press 2, 3, 0.
• To resume normal playback, select Off
from the A-B Repeat menu, or press
CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play
Mode menu) is displayed.
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For
example, for track 6, press 6.
ENTER
3
Start playback.
Note
1 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
2 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.
89
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Playback
Repeat play
Program
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title (01-03)
Title 01
Title 02
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
A L L
Title 03
There are various repeat play options,
depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if
you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also
possible to use repeat play together with
program play to repeat the tracks/chapters
in the program list (see Program play
ENTER
1
2
Select a title, chapter, folder
below).
or track for the current step in the
program list.
ENTER
After pressing ENTER to add the title/
chapter/folder/track, the step number
automatically moves down one.
•
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play
Mode menu, then choose a repeat play
mode.
• To insert a step into the program list,
highlight the step number where you
want to insert another step, then select a
chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent
steps move down one.
Play Mode
Repeat Disc
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
• To delete a step from the program list,
highlight the step you want to delete,
then press CLEAR.
• To resume normal playback, select
Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu,
or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as
the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
3
Repeat step 2 to build up a program
list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/
chapters/folders/tracks.
Program play
WMA/MP3
HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD
4
Play the program list.
Program play remains active until you
cancel program play, erase the program list,
eject the disc or switch off the recorder.
This feature lets you program the play order
of titles/chapters /folders/tracks on a disc or
the HDD.
2
ENTER
Tip
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play
• To save your program list and exit the
program edit screen without starting
playback, press HOME MENU or SHIFT
+ 9 (DVR-545HX-S only).
Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit Program’.
The Input/Edit Program screen varies
according to the disc type. Below is the DVD
input screen.
• During program play, press ꢈNEXT to
skip to the next program step.
Note
1 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
2 When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be some-
times be played, depending on the disc.
90
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
08
• To repeat play the program list, select
Program Repeat from the Repeat Play
Mode menu (see Repeat play on
page 90).
Switching DVD and DivX
soundtracks
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch
off program play (if no menu OSD, such
as the Disc Navigator, is displayed).
Press while stopped to erase the
program list.
DVD-Video DivX
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title
recorded with two or more soundtracks
(often in different languages), you can
2
• From the Program menu you can also:
Start Program Play – Starts playback of
a saved program list
Cancel Program Play – Turns off
program play, but does not erase the
program list
switch the soundtrack during playback.
Check the disc packaging for details of the
soundtrack options.
AUDIO
•
DVR-940HX-S:
Erase Program List – Erases the
program list and turns off program play
SHIFT
AUDIO
•
DVR-545HX-S:
+
Change the audio soundtrack.
The current audio language is shown on-
screen and in the front panel display.
Displaying and switching
subtitles
• The sound may drop out for a few
seconds when switching soundtracks.
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital
and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog
audio output when DTS is selected. To
listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect
this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV
amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder
via the digital output. See Connecting to
an AV amplifier/receiver on page 23 for
connection details.
DVD-Video DivX
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in
one or more languages; the disc box will
usually tell you which subtitle languages are
available. You can switch subtitle language
1
during playback.
Check the disc packaging for details of the
subtitle options.
SUBTITLE
•
DVR-940HX-S:
SHIFT
SUBTITLE
•
DVR-545HX-S:
+
Select/change the subtitle language.
The current subtitle language is shown on-
screen and in the front panel display.
• To switch off subtitles, press
SUBTITLE (DVR-940HX-S) or SHIFT + 5
(DVR-545HX-S) then CLEAR.
Note
1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to
access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 144.
2 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to ac-
cess.
91
En
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 144.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Playback
Switching audio channels
Super VCD
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo
(default)
1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD
WMA/MP3
1
For HDD and VR mode content recorded
with bilingual audio, you can switch between
left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or both
2
(L+R).
Switching camera angles
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you
can switch between stereo, just the left
channel or just the right channel.
DVD-Video
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks.
With these discs you can switch between the
two soundtracks as well as individual
channels in each.
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot
from two or more angles—check the disc
box for details: it should be marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the
same icon appears on screen to let you know
that other angles are available (this can be
switched off if you prefer—see Angle
Indicator on page 147).
AUDIO
•
DVR-940HX-S:
SHIFT
AUDIO
•
DVR-545HX-S:
+
Press repeatedly to display/switch the
audio channel.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are
ANGLE
•
•
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S:
indicated on-screen.
SHIFT
ANGLE
+
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Switch the camera angle.
• The angle number is displayed on-
screen.
• If the disc was paused, playback starts
again with the new angle.
L+R – Both channels (default)
L – Left channel only
R – Right channel only
WMA/MP3
CD Video CD
Stereo – Stereo (default)
1/L – Left channel only
2/R – Right channel only
Note
1 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 146).
2 When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via
the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital ꢄ PCM (see
Dolby Digital Out on page 143) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel.
92
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
08
Shows recording restrictions for
the current channel program
Displaying disc information
on-screen
ꢅStop
DVD-RW VR
Original
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
Copy Once
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
Rem. 0h35m
You can display various on-screen
information about the disc loaded or the
HDD.
Disc Name
:
Comedy shows
DVD Mode
DISPLAY
Indicates copy-protected material
Indicates a multi-angle scene
•
Display/change the on-screen
information.
ꢄPlay
3–2
0. 00. 15
!
• Press once to show the HDD and
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity
together. Press again to show the status
of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable
disc).
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0h01m52s
ꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆ
4.32Mbps
Title Name
:
21/11 Football match
Indicates the data transfer rate
• To hide the information display, press
DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.
Tip
• See Switching camera angles on page 92
for more on multi-angle scene
switching.
HDD and removable disc activity
display
• When using the simultaneous play and
record feature, the display shows
information for playback only.
• During real-time copy, the copy source
playback information is displayed.
• The Video mode disc displays become
the same as a DVD-Video disc once the
disc is finalized.
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the
HDD/DVD button to switch between the two
kinds of display.
The example displays below show high-
speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD
chase playback.
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
• The total recording time figure shown in
parenthesis is calculated based on a
12 cm / 4.7 GB disc at the displayed
record setting.
HDD
Hi-Speed Copy
HDD ꢄ DVD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Remain –h––m
Stop
0h08m left
• Recording and playback times for TV
recordings are approximately 0.1 %
shorter than the actual time. This is
because of the slightly different frame
rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD.
• The frame number is shown next to the
elapsed time display when the disc is
paused.
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages
may appear in the stop or recording
displays. These indicate that the
broadcast TV program contains copy
control information.
Recording time
Relative playback position
93
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
CPhlaapteyr i9ng and recording from a
DV camcorder
You can play back and record video from a
DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack
on the front panel of this recorder.
connected to the DV jack, or the signal is
copy-protected, recording will pause. It
will automatically restart once there is a
recordable signal.
• The recorder will only start recording
from the DV IN jack if there is a valid
signal. Recording will pause if the signal
is interrupted during recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using
Copy Guard, you will not be able to
record it. See Restrictions on video
recording on page 68 for more details.
Important
• If you connect a second recorder using a
DV cable, you cannot control the second
unit from this one.
• You can’t control this unit remotely from
a component connected to the DV IN
jack.
Playing from a DV camcorder
Recording from a DV
camcorder
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control
both the camcorder and this recorder.
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.
2
From the Initial Settings menu, check
that the DV audio input is setup as you
require.
See DV Input on page 143 for more on this.
Important
• The source signal must be DVC-SD
format.
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled
using this recorder’s remote.
• You can’t record date and time
information from DV cassette.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Bilingual
Recording are as you want them (see
Audio In on page 142).
HOME MENU
3
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video
Playback’ from the Home Menu.
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape
is blank, or has copy-protected material
on it, this recorder will pause recording.
Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal.
However, if there is more than 10
seconds of blank tape, this recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder
should stop (depending on the
4
Start playback on the camcorder.
Images from the camcorder should appear
on your TV.
• To record the incoming video, press
1
HDD/DVD to select the HDD or a DVD
for recording, then press ꢀ REC. Press
ꢀ STOP REC to finish recording.
If there is no signal from the device
camcorder).
Note
94
En
1 DVR-940HX-S: If the external HDD is connected (HDD2), this can also be selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
09
For best results when recording from a DV
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend
cueing the camcorder to the place you want
to start recording from and setting the
camcorder to play-pause.
ENTER
7
Select ‘Start Rec’.
ꢅStop
ꢅStop
1.02.22
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is
Control with these
Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
buttons
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
ꢉ
ꢆ
ꢄ
ꢅ
ꢊ
ꢋ
ꢎ
HDD
Rem.
SP (2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
REC MODE
2
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S:
• You can pause or stop the recording by
selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from
the on-screen display. You cannot
control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
REC MODE
SHIFT
+
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 72 for detailed information.
• If you restart recording after stopping the
camcorder, the first few seconds of the
camcorder tape will not be recorded.
Use the pause button on your camcorder
instead and recording will start
immediately.
• HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only:
A chapter marker is inserted every time
there is a break in the timecode on the
DV tape. This happens when the
recording is stopped or paused then
restarted, for example.
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check
that the DV audio input is setup as you
require.
See DV Input on page 143 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Bilingual
Recording are as you want them (see
Audio In on page 142).
HOME MENU
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a
DV Source’ from the Home Menu.
• DV recording only works when the DV
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape
loaded.
• If you don’t want to see the DV recording
screen during recording, press DISPLAY
to hide it (press again to display).
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV
recording screen using the HOME
MENU or RETURN/EXIT button.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.
Find the place on the camcorder tape
1
6
that you want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point
from which you want to record.
• Depending on your camcorder, you can
use this recorder’s remote to control the
camcorder using the ꢅ , ꢄ , ꢆ , ꢉ ,
ꢊ , ꢋ and ꢎ buttons.
Note
95
En
1 DVR-940HX-S: It is not possible to select the external HDD (HDD2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
About DV
Frequently Asked Questions
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with
the recorder!
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-
1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to
this recorder using a DV cable for input of
audio, video, data and control signals.
Check that the DV cable is properly
connected. Also make sure that what
you’re trying to record is not copy-
protected.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are
trademarks.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off
the camcorder then switch back on.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-
format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital
satellite receivers and Digital VHS video
recorders are not compatible.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
• You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at a time to this recorder.
• You cannot control this recorder from
external equipment connected via the
DV IN jack.
• It may not always be possible to control
the connected camcorder via the DV IN
jack.
• DV camcorders can usually record audio
as stereo 16-bit / 48 kHz, or twin stereo
tracks of 12-bit / 32 kHz. This recorder
can only record one stereo audio track.
Set the DV Input setting as required
(see DV Input on page 143).
Try switching the DV Input setting (see
DV Input on page 143) between Stereo 1
1
and Stereo 2.
DV video setting
Use this setting to adjust the picture quality
of the incoming video from the DV device
connected to the DV jack of this recorder.
HOME MENU
•
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video
Setting’ from the Home Menu.
For detailed information on this setting,
see Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs on page 133.
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be
32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz).
• Picture disturbance in the recording
may occur if the source component
pauses playback or plays an unrecorded
section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable is
disconnected.
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is
no output functionality.
Note
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You
can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 142).
96
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
10
CEhdapitetri1n0 g
Editing options
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.
DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM
HDD
(VR mode)
Original
Play List
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Create (page 99)
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Play (page 99)
Erase (page 100)
Edit > Title Name (page 100)
Edit > Set Thumbnail
(page 102)
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Edit > Erase Section
(page 102)
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Edit > Divide (page 103)
Edit > Chapter Edit
(page 104)
ꢀ
ꢀ
Edit > Set Genre (page 105)
Edit > Lock (page 105)
Edit > Move (page 106)
Edit > Combine (page 106)
Genre Name (page 107)
Multi-Mode (page 107)
Undo (page 108)
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ *1
ꢀ *1
*1 DVD-R/-RW only
97
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Editing
The Disc Navigator screen
•
•
Press to display the command
menu panel. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ and ENTER
buttons to navigate the menus.
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can
edit video content on unfinalized Video mode
and VR mode DVD-R/-RW discs, DVD+R/
+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video
content on the hard disk drive.
PREV
NEXT
When in the title list, press to
display the previous/next page if there
are more titles than can be displayed.
Important
DISPLAY
•
•
Press to change the title
information displayed in the title list.
HDD/DVD
• Titles that have been recorded with a
Input Line System setting different to the
current setting of the recorder are shown
in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Additional
information about the TV system settings
on page 150.
Press to switch between the HDD
and DVD Disc Navigator screens.
• If you are editing a VR mode DVD-R/-RW
or DVD-RAM disc you can display the
Play List by selecting Play List from the
view options panel (press ꢃ, then select
Play List from the view options, then
Play List).
• During recording, if you display the Disc
Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles
may appear with a
mark. These titles
were recorded with a Input Line System
setting different to the current setting of
the recorder. During recording, these
titles cannot be played.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
23:00 FRI 3/12
Style
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
4
Titles
2h00m(1.0G)
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
PlayList
Original
9
SP
HDD/DVD
MENU
2h00m(1.0G)
1
1
2
Select the HDD or DVD.
• Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are recently recorded titles that
haven’t yet been played.
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Display the Disc Navigator
screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you
do this.
DISC
NAVIGATOR
3
Press to exit the Disc Navigator.
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible
from the Home Menu.
View options panel
Title list
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
h00m(1.0G)
Selected
title
2
4
Titles
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Recent first
All Genres
MENU
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Available
recording time
Title thumbnail Title information Command
menu panel
Note
98
En
1 DVR-940HX-S: If the external HDD is connected and available for editing, you can select it here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
10
Editing accuracy
Disc Navigator (DVD)
0Titles
Some editing commands ask you whether
you want to keep Video mode compatibility
or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible
Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).
Play
No title
Erase
2
Edit
4
Titles
Play List
Create
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The
edit point is accurate to the exact frame you
choose. However, this accuracy is not
preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a
Video mode DVD.
Undo
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
Video mode compatible editing is less
precise. The edit point you choose will only
be accurate to within 0.5 to 1 second. On the
other hand, these edit points will be
preserved if you use high-speed copy to
make a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW.
2
Select an original title to add
to the Play List.
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles
as necessary to the Play List.
Play
HDD genres
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
The large capacity of the HDD means that
there may be many hours of video in the
recorder. To help you organize your HDD
video content you can assign different
genres to titles. There are 20 genres in total,
including five user-definable ones that you
can name as you like.
Use this function to start playback of a title.
1
Highlight the title you want
to play.
ENTER
Create
2
Select ‘Play’ from the
command menu panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Play List only
Use this function to create a Play List and
add titles to it.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
Before you can use this command, make
sure that the Play List is switched on in the
view options panel on the left.
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
Play
SP
Erase
2
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
4
Titles
Edit
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
S
Recent first
All Genres
Genre Name
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
S
ENTER
M
u
lti-Mode
1
Select ‘Create’ from the
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
command menu panel.
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
99
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Editing
Erase
Title Name
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
You can give titles new names of up to 64
characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and
HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for
Video mode recordings and DVD+R/+RW
discs.
When you erase titles from the HDD or
Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the
available recording space increases
accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video
mode DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc increases
the available recording time only if it is the
1
1
Highlight the title you want
last title on the disc.
to name (or rename).
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a
DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R,
will not result in any more free space on the
disc.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’
from the command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
1
Highlight the title you want
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 P
to erase.
Set Thumbnail
Title name
4
Titles
Erase Section
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00
Divide
Fri 3/12
Chapter Edit
ENTER
Recent first
All Genres
Set Genre
2
Select ‘Erase’ from the
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00
Lock
Thu 2/12
command menu panel.
Cancel
19:00 MON 29/11
HDD
SP
19:00
Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
ENTER
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
ENTER
3
Input a name for the selected
title.
Tip
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing
CLEAR when the title is highlighted.
Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER.
Input Title Name
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
A B C D E
F
G H
I
J
K L M
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
~
+
–
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
–
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
–
/2
®
/4
< < 14
/
o
–
1
3
2
3
1
¿
¶
´
OK
Clear
Space
• A name generated automatically by the
recorder will already be in the name
input section of the screen. Use the ꢉ/
ꢊ buttons to change the cursor
position.
Note
100
En
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
10
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper
or lower-case, or use the CASE
SELECTION buttons (ꢇ PREV/ꢈ
NEXT).
• You can also use the CLEAR button to
delete characters directly (press and
hold for two seconds to delete the whole
name). For other remote control key
shortcuts, see Using the remote key
shortcuts to input a name below.
Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name
The table below shows the remote control
key shortcuts that you can use to input
characters in the name input screen.
Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through
the characters shown.
If you want to enter two characters in
succession that are both on the same button
(for example a P and an R), press ꢊ to
advance the cursor one space manually
between inputting the two characters.
• For discs formatted on a different DVD
recorder, you will see only a limited
character set.
Key
1
Characters
Key
6
Characters
ENTER
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name
. , ’ ? ! – & 1
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó
ø ñ
and return to the main Disc Navigator
screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator
screen without saving changes to the
title name, press RETURN/EXIT.
a b c 2 ä à á â ã
æ ç
p q r s 7 $
2
7
*1
ÿ/ß
d e f 3 è é ë ê
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡
j k l 5 £
t u v 8 ü ù û ú
3
4
8
9
w x y z 9
0
5
0
ꢉ
[cursor back]
ꢊ
[cursor for-
ward]
ꢇ/ [change case] CLEAR [clear charac-
ꢈ
ter]
ꢆ
<space>
ꢅ
[finish name
input]
*2
~
+
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # ∗ % ¥ | + =
{ } [ ] < >
*1
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
*2
DVR-545HX-S: SHIFT
101
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Editing
Set Thumbnail
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the
Edit screen.
You can change the thumbnail picture that
appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to
any frame that appears in that title.
Erase Section
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Using this command you can delete a part of
a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial
breaks in a recording made from the TV.
1
Highlight the title you want
to change the thumbnail picture for.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’
1
Highlight the title containing
from the command menu panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from
the section you want to erase.
which you can find the frame you want.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
10
from the command menu panel.
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 P
Title name
Set Thumbnail
4
Titles
Erase Section
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
Divide
20:00
Fri 3/12
ENTER
Chapter Edit
Recent first
All Genres
Set Genre
3
edit.
HDD only: Select the type of
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00
Lock
Thu 2/12
Cancel
19:00 MON 29/11
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
19:00
Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
DVD RECORDER
!
1h00m(1.0G)
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
3
Use the playback controls (ꢄ, ꢆ, ꢉ,
ꢊ, etc.) to find a suitable frame, then
press ENTER to set.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m
Rec. time
• For more information about these
options, see Editing accuracy on page 99.
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
ꢆ
OK
Exit
You can also use the chapter and time
search features (press the YELLOW button
(DVR-940HX-S) or SHIFT + 9 (DVR-545HX-S)),
and the
CM SKIP and
CM BACK
buttons/Smart Jog.
102
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
10
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the
playback controls (ꢄ, ꢆ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to
find the start of the section to erase, then
press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates
the current play position in the title. After
pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of
the section.
1
Highlight the title you want
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from
to divide.
ENTER
2
the command menu panel.
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
Erase Section (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
DVD RECORDER
2h00m
Rec. time
!
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
10-1 00.00.09.15
ꢆ
Play Pause
From
To
Exit
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
ENTER
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the
• For more information about these
options, see Editing accuracy on page 99.
same way, find the end of the section to
erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker
indicates the end of the section, with the
section itself marked in red.
4
Use the playback controls (ꢄ, ꢆ, ꢉ,
ꢊ, etc.) to find the place you want to
divide the title.
Divide Title (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’
2h00m
Rec. time
to cancel.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few
seconds of video either side of the marked
section to see how the edit will look.
10–1 00.00.09.15
ꢆ
Play Pause
Divide
Cancel
• When editing VR mode Original content,
you may not be able to erase very short
sections (less than five seconds).
ENTER
5
Press to divide the title at the
current playback position.
Divide
ENTER
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
HDD
Play List only
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
Use this command to divide a title into two.
Note that once divided, the two new HDD
titles cannot be recombined into one again.
to cancel.
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
!
Yes
No
103
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Editing
You can keep dividing the chapter as
many times as you wish (up to 999
chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or
99 chapters per HDD title).
Chapter Edit
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on
the HDD you can edit individual chapters
within a title, with commands for erasing,
combining and dividing.
1
2
• Erase /Move – Erase or move
chapters: Select the chapter you want to
erase/move and press ENTER. Select
whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
1
Highlight the title that contains the
chapters you want to edit.
Move command only: Select the
destination for the chapter, and press
ENTER.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
from the command menu panel.
19:00 Mon 29/11 P
Erase
Rec. time
Chapter
1
Move
0
Cancel
ENTER
001
002
003
004
005
3
HDD only: Select the type of
Exit
Divide
edit.
Erase/Move
Combine
DVD RECORDER
!
3
• Combine – Combine two adjacent
chapters into one: Highlight the bar
divider between two adjacent chapters
and press ENTER.
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
Rec. time
1h00m
• For more information about these
1
2
3
4
5
options, see Editing accuracy on page 99.
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
4
Select the command you want:
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or
more parts: Use the playback controls
(ꢄ, ꢆ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to find the point at
which you want to divide the chapter,
then press ENTER.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the
main Disc Navigator screen.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
Rec. time
Chapters
1h00m
5
1–1
Play
0.00.00
ꢄ
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
Note
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 VR mode Play List only.
3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been
divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into
one.
104
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
10
Set Genre
Lock
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HDD
Original only
Use this command to assign a genre to a
title.
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited
or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it,
you can always unlock it later.
1
Highlight the title you want
to assign a genre to.
Important
• You can’t undo any edits made before
changing the lock status. You also can’t
undo a lock/unlock command using the
Undo option from the Disc Navigator
menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from
the command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
1
Highlight the title you want to lock
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 P
(or unlock).
Title name
Set Thumbnail
4
Titles
Erase Section
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
Divide
20:00
Fri 3/12
Chapter Edit
Recent first
All Genres
ENTER
Set Genre
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00
Lock
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the
Thu 2/12
Cancel
command menu panel.
19:00 MON 29/11
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
19:00
Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 P
Title name
Set Thumbnail
4
Titles
ENTER
Erase Section
9
20:00 FRI 3/12
Divide
20:00
Fri 3/12
3
Select a genre for the title.
Chapter Edit
Recent first
All Genres
Set Genre
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12
Lock
22:00
Thu 2/12
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
Cancel
10Titles
19:00 MON 29/11
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
19:00
Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
NoCategory
4
Titles
9
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00
Fri 3/12
Recent first
All Genres
An unlocked title will become locked; a
locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a
padlock icon.
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00
Thu 2/12
19:00 MON 29/1
HDD
SP
19:00
Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
105
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Editing
Move
Combine
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Play List only
Play List only
Use this function to re-arrange the playing
order of Play List titles.
Use this function to combine two Play List
titles into one.
1
Highlight the title you want
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the
1
Highlight the title you want
to move.
to combine.
This title will remain in the same place after
combining with another title.
ENTER
2
command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from
the command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
1
2
3
4
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM
Title name
Disc Navigator (DVD)
Se
EraseSection
Divide
t
T
humbnail
4
Titles
10Titles
12/2 THU 10:00PM
12/2Thu 10:00PM
1
2
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Title name
Chapter Edit
Play List
Se
t
T
h
u
m
b
ail
n
4
Titles
Move
Erase Section
Combine
12/3 FRI 8:00PM
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9
20:00 FRI 3/12
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Chapter Edit
Cancel
Play List
Move
12/3 FRI 11:00PM
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Combine
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
Cancel
0h30m
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
DVD
VR Mode
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
3
Select a new position for the
title.
ENTER
3
Select another title to
Title to move
combine with the first.
This title will be appended to the first title
selected.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
1
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be
appended to title 1:
4
Titles
2
3
4
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
Play List
MENU
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
SP
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
1h00m(1.0G)
1
2
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
4
SP
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
2
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles
1h00m(1.0G)
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Play List
MENU
Insert position
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
SP
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play
List is displayed.
1h00m(1.0G)
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
DVD
2
SP
VR Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
0h30m
106
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
10
ENTER
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
3
Input a name for the genre.
to cancel.
• The name can be up to 12 characters
long.
• For information on remote control key
short cuts, see Using the remote key
shortcuts to input a name on page 101.
OK to combine titles
!
1
and 3
?
Yes
No
Input Genre Name
Genre Name
Free
1
A B C D E
F
G H
I
J
K L M
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
HDD
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
Use this command to rename one of the five
user-definable genres (Free 1 to Free 5).
~
+
–
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
–
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
–
/2
®
/4
< < 14
/
o
–
1
3
2
3
1
¿
¶
´
Space
OK
Clear
ENTER
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
4
and exit.
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
Play
SP
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
Erase
2
Edit
4
Titles
9
8
7
Multi-Mode
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
S
Recent first
All Genres
Genre Name
HDD
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
S
Multi-Mode
Multi-Mode allows you to select several
titles, then select a command that will be
applied to all of them. In this way you can
select multiple titles and then erase them all
at once, for example.
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
ENTER
2
Select one of the user-
definable genre names.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the
Disc Navigator (HDD)
command menu panel.
10Titles
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
Free1
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
Free2
4
Titles
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
Free3
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
10
Free4
Free5
23:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
Play
Erase
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
Recent first
All Genres
2
Edit
4
Titles
Cancel
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00
Fri 3/12 Pr
Recent first
All Genres
Genre Name
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
22:00 THU 2/12
2
SP
22:00
Thu 2/12 Pr
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
Multi-Mode
30h30m
19:00 MON 29/11
HDD
SP
19:00
Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
107
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Editing
Frequently asked questions
ENTER
2
Select titles from the title list.
• Why doesn’t the available recording time
increase when I erase titles from a VR
mode DVD-R?
Selected titles are marked with a ꢅ.
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or
DVD+R), the titles are no longer
ENTER
3
Select the command that you
displayed, but the content remains on
the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.
want applied to all the marked titles.
For example, select Erase to erase all the
marked titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Multi-Mode
3Titles
• I can’t edit my disc!
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Erase
Lock
4
SP
You may find that as the available
recording time is reduced on a VR mode
DVD-R disc, editing is no longer
possible. This is because information
about your edits requires a certain
amount of disc space. As you edit, this
information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
2
4
Titles
Unlock
9
Change Genre
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
S
Recent first
All Genres
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
Single Mode
S
7
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Once the command is completed, Multi-
Mode is automatically exited.
Undo
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
If you make a mistake while editing, you can
generally undo it. There is one level of undo
(in other words, you can only undo the last
edit you made).
ENTER
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the
command menu panel.
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the
Disc Navigator screen.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
0Titles
No title
Play
Erase
2
4
Titles
Edit
Play List
Create
Undo
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
108
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and backup
11
CChaoptpery11ing and backup
Restrictions on copying
Introduction
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected
using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be
copied to the HDD.
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
• Back up important recordings stored on
the HDD to a DVD.
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the
HDD to play in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD
for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to
DVD.
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the
One Touch Copy feature. This copies the
currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD
title to the (internal) HDD. See One Touch
Copy on page 110 for detailed instructions.
Some video material is copy-once protected.
This means that it can be recorded to HDD,
but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you
want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a
CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW,
ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM-
compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on
page 68 for more on this). Only one instance
of a copy-once protected title can be added
to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied,
the title is erased from the HDD (it is
therefore not possible to copy a locked title
that is copy-once protected).
For more sophisticated copying tasks you
can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and
edit titles so that you only copy the bits you
want. See Using Copy Lists on page 111 for
detailed instructions.
You can identify copy-once protected
material during playback by displaying disc
information on-screen. If the current title is
copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your
recordings at high-speed. Depending on the
recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and
various other factors, copying can be as fast
as one minute per hour of video. See
Minimum copying times on page 154 for
more on copying times.
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only
for lawful copying and you are advised to
check carefully what is lawful copying in the
country in which you are making a copy.
Copying of copyright material such as films
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a
legal exception or consented to by the
rightowners.
If you want to save disc space you can copy
video at a lower recording quality (for
example, an XP recording on the HDD
copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way
is always done in real-time.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a
Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW,
the chapter markers in the original material
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into
the copy at intervals, according to the Auto
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter
(Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on
page 146).
109
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Copying and backup
Canceling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s
started.
One Touch Copy
* See also Copyright above.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
The One Touch Copy feature copies the
currently playing or selected (in the Disc
Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to
•
Press and hold for more than a
second.
1
(internal) HDD. The whole title is copied,
Copying is canceled and the video already
regardless of where in the title you start the
copy.
copied is erased.
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy,
the space available for recording does
not return to the pre-copy figure.
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same
recording mode. When copying DVD to
HDD, the copy is made in whatever
recording mode is currently set.
Notes on copying using One Touch
Copy
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is
loaded when trying to copy from the HDD.
Copying to DVD
REC MODE
1
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S:
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as
thumbnail picture markers for the Disc
Navigator, are also copied. However, if
you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or
DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40
REC MODE
SHIFT
+
If you’re copying from DVD to the
HDD, select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher
than the title playing will not result in a better
quality recording.
characters of a name are copied.
• The chapter markers in the copy may not
be in exactly the same positions as the
original when recording on to a Video
mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW.
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy
function to copy a title if any part of the
title is copy-once protected.
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios
can’t be copied to a Video mode disc.
Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM
disc for this type of material.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
2
Press during playback to copy
the current title.
The front panel display indicates that the title
is being copied.
• High-speed copying is used when
copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback
continues while copying.
• Real-time copying is used when copying
from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts
from the beginning of the title.
2
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes )
widescreen material can’t be copied to a
Video mode disc. Use a VR mode
DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this
type of material.
Note
1 DVR-940HX-S: Copying to the external HDD (HDD2) is not possible.
2 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
110
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and backup
11
• When HDD Recording Format is set to
Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/
MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high-
speed copied to a Video mode disc.
Please use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or
DVD-RAM.
• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts
cannot be high-speed copied to a Video
mode DVD. Please use a VR mode DVD-
R/-RW or DVD-RAM.
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be copied to
single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using
One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs
for titles over 8 hours.
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP
or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/
+RW using One Touch Copy.
Using Copy Lists
* See also Copyright on page 109.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of
HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy.
When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can,
however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-
naming titles, for example. Edits you make to
titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual
video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the
Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the
knowledge that the actual content is not
being altered.
Copying from HDD to DVD
• DVR-940HX-S: When high-speed copying
from the internal or external HDD to
DVD, it is not possible to play from or
record to the other connected HDD.
Important
• The recorder can only store one Copy List
at a time.
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line
System setting is changed (see
Additional information about the TV
system settings on page 150).
• Resetting the recorder to its factory
settings (see Resetting the recorder on
page 167) will erase the Copy List.
Copying to the (internal) HDD
• The maximum title length for copying is
12 hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also
copied, except when copying from a
finalized Video mode disc.
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter
markers for the Disc Navigator are
copied, but their position in the copy
may be slightly changed from the
original.
• If some part of the title being copied is
copy-protected, copying will start, but
the copy-protected portions will not be
copied.
1
Load a recordable DVD.
• It is possible to complete the following
steps without having a recordable DVD
loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD
loaded); however, the steps are slightly
different.
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode)
disc for the copy, make sure it is
initialized before you start.
• DVR-940HX-S: Copying to the external
HDD (HDD2) is not possible.
HOME MENU
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home
Menu.
111
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Copying and backup
ENTER
ENTER
3
Select ‘HDD ꢄ DVD’.
5
Add titles to the Copy List
• DVR-940HX-S: If an external HDD is
connected, select HDD ꢄDVD from the
next screen to select the internal HDD to
copy from.
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).
8
Title
Copy
Select Title
HDD
DVD (Video mode)
1
>
2
>
3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr
MON 27/03 21:00 Mon27/03 Pr
S A T 25/03 23:00 S a t 25/03 Pr
THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr
WED 22/03 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr
MON 20/03 13:00 Mon20/03 Pr
F R I 17/03 21:00 F r i 17/03 Pr
WED 15/03 20:00 Wed15/03 Pr
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
Back
Next
Recent first
All Genres
HDD
DVD
HDD
DVD/CD
Disc Back-up
20:00
20:00
Wed29/03
Pr
1h00m(2.0G)
Sports SP
2
SP
Pr
2
• If this is the first time to create a Copy
List, skip to step 5 below.
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
0.0G
4.3G
4
If there is already a Copy List stored
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are
highlighted in pink.
in the recorder, choose whether to
‘Create New Copy List’ or ‘Continue
Using Previous Copy List’.
There are some restrictions on titles that can
be added to the Copy List if you are copying
to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW:
• When adding titles that contain copy-
once protected material, the copy-once
parts will not be added.
Continue Using Previous Copy List
Create New Copy List
• When adding titles that contain material
of more than one aspect ratio (screen
size), each part with a different aspect
ratio will be added as a separate title if
high-speed copying is possible.
• If you select Continue Using Previous
Copy List, skip to step 10 below.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will
erase any Copy List already stored in the
recorder.
1
Depending on the title , high-speed copying
may not be possible to a Video mode disc.
Note
1 • Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8
(Video Mode On).
• LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.
• Bilingual recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
112
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and backup
11
6
Press ꢀ to display the command
A menu of editing commands appears:
menu panel.
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the
Copy List (see Erase on page 100).
The Command Menu panel
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in
the Copy List (see Title Name on
page 100).
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see
Erase Section on page 102).
8
Title
Copy
Select Title
HDD
DVD (Video mode)
1
>
2
>
3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr
MON 27/03 21:00 Mon27/03 Pr
S A T 25/03 23:00 S a t 25/03 Pr
THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr
WED 22/03 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr
MON 20/03 13:00 Mon20/03 Pr
F R I 17/03 21:00 F r i 17/03 Pr
WED 15/03 20:00 Wed15/03 Pr
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
Back
Next
Recent first
All Genres
• Move – Change the order of titles in the
Copy List (see Move on page 106).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in
the Copy List.
20:00
20:00
Wed29/03
Pr
1h00m(2.0G)
Sports SP
2
SP
Pr
2
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List
into two (see Divide on page 103).
• Combine – Combine two titles in the
Copy List into one (see Combine on
page 106).
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title
Edit screen.
2
Title
Copy
HDD
DVD (Video mode)
Title Edit
1
>
2
>
3
1
2
20:00 Wed
20:00 Wed
29/03 Pr
22/03 Pr
2
2
SP
SP
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a
Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on
page 104):
Back
Next
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/
Change the chapter order.
• Combine – Combine two chapters
into one.
20:00
Wed29/03
Pr
2
SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail
frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on
page 102).
8
To edit a title, highlight it using the
ꢁ/ꢂ buttons, then press ENTER.
2
Title
• Recording Mode – Set the picture
quality of the copy (see Recording Mode
on page 116).
• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio
should be copied when copying from
HDD to Video mode DVD (see Bilingual
on page 117).
Copy
Title Edit
HDD
DVD (Video mode)
1
>
2
>
3
1
2
20:00 Wed
20:00 Wed
29
Erase
22
Title Name
Back
Next
Erase Section
Move
Preview
Cancel
20:00
Wed29/03
Pr
2
SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have
that need editing.
9
Display the command menu
panel.
113
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Copying and backup
ENTER
ENTER
10
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
11
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start
copying.
2
Title
Copy
Title Edit
HDD
DVD (Video mode)
1
>
2
>
3
Copy
HDD DVD (Video Mode)
1
2
20:00 Wed
20:00 Wed
29/03 Pr
22/03 Pr
2
2
SP
SP
1 > 2 > 3
Start Copy
Back
Next
HDD
DVD-RW
Video Mode
Return
Recording Mode
Input Disc Name
Finalize
Copy Time 0h 16m
Recording Mode
Disc Name
High-Speed
Off
20:00
Wed29/03
Pr
2
SP
Finalize
Start Copy
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL
disc and the copy will span both layers,
the Copy List Total bar will be purple.
There are several options available from the
next screen:
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be
half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL
or DVD+R DL disc is already full.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to
change the recording quality (see
1
Recording Mode on page 116).
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to
change the disc name. Input a name of
up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or
40 characters for a Video mode disc or
DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is
similar to that of naming titles; see Title
Name on page 100.)
• Select Finalize if you want to
automatically finalize a Video mode DVD
2
or DVD+R after copying. Select a title
menu style from the following screen.
Note
1 Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using high-speed copy.
2 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
114
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and backup
11
Copying from DVD to (internal)
HDD
Copying between internal
and external HDDs
(DVR-940HX-S)
If you have connected an external HDD you
can copy between the internal and external
HDDs using the high-speed copy feature.
Important
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t
accessible when a finalized Video mode
disc or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as
the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you
can still use the One Touch Copy
function, however (See One Touch Copy
on page 110).
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home
Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘HDD ꢄ HDD’.
• The recorder can only store one Copy List
at a time.
ENTER
• The Copy List will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are
erased or edited.
3
Select ‘HDD ꢄ HDD2’ or
‘HDD2 ꢄ HDD’ as required.
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Play List
and Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or
finalized.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.
– the recorder is reset to its factory
settings (see Resetting the recorder on
page 167).
• It may not be possible to copy from a
DVD disc that was recorded on a
different DVD recorder or a PC.
ENTER
5
Select the titles you want to
copy.
Press ENTER after each title to add it to the
Copy List. Selected titles are highlighted in a
different colour.
• DVR-940HX-S: copying to the external
HDD (HDD2) is not possible.
ENTER
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home
6
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
Menu.
Check the contents of the Copy List before
moving on to the next step.
ENTER
2
3
Select ‘DVD/CD ꢄ HDD’.
ENTER
7
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
ENTER
Select a Copy List type.
ENTER
• Selecting Create New Copy List will
erase any Copy List already stored in the
recorder.
8
Select ‘Start Copying’ to start
copying.
115
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Copying and backup
Recording Mode
ENTER
4
Add titles to the Copy List
ENTER
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are
highlighted in pink.
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from
the command menu panel.
ENTER
ENTER
2
Select a recording mode for
5
Select ‘Next’ from the
the copy.
command menu panel to proceed to the
title edit screen.
1
• High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is
copied at the same recording quality as
the original.
ENTER
2
6
Select a title to edit.
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN – The Copy
List is copied at the specified recording
quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy
at a higher quality setting than the
original, the copy will not be better
quality than the original.)
A menu appears of Copy List editing
commands:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the
Copy List (see Erase on page 100).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the
Copy List (see Move on page 106).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in
the Copy List.
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have
that need editing.
If you select MN above, you can also
change the level setting (MN1 to MN32
3
or LPCM) from the Recording Quality box
that appears.
2,4
• Optimized – The recording quality is
automatically adjusted so that the Copy
List fits on to the space available on the
disc. Copying is carried out in real-time.
ENTER
When you change the recording mode
setting, you can see how much disc space it
will require. If this is more than is available,
it shows up in red and you won’t be able to
start copying. In this case, either change the
recording quality, or press RETURN/EXIT to
go back to the Copy List screen and erase
one or more titles from the Copy List.
7
Select ‘Next’ from the
command menu panel to proceed to the
copy options screen.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to
change the recording quality (see
Recording Mode on page 116).
ENTER
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start
copying.
Note
1 When copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same position as the original.
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD or
DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at reg-
ular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video)) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/
+RW) on page 146.
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.
4 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.
116
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and backup
11
3
Load the disc you want to make a
Bilingual
backup of.
You can only make backup copies of
finalized Video mode discs, finalized DVD+R
or DVD+RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/
DVD+R DL discs).
1
Select the title containing the
audio you want to change.
Disc Back-up
ENTER
2
Select ‘Bilingual’ from the
No disc.
command menu panel.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Cancel
Start
ENTER
3
Select a bilingual audio
option.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Start’.
Using disc backup
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
* See also Copyright on page 109.
This feature offers a simple way to make a
backup copy of a finalized Video mode disc
or DVD+R/+RW. The data is copied first to
Cancel
Start
1
the (internal) hard disk drive , then on to
• To see the progress of the backup, press
another recordable DVD disc.
DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the backup process by
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more
than one second.
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc
backup’ from the Home Menu.
5
When the data has been copied, take
ENTER
out the disc and load a blank* recordable
DVD.
2
Select a backup option.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the
disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the
previous contents of the disc will be erased in
the backup process.
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing data
Erase back-up data
Disc Back-up
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc
There are three backup options:
• Start new disc back-up – Start making
a backup of a disc.
Cancel
Start
• Resume writing data – Record the
backup data already on the HDD to a
recordable DVD.
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or
DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the
backup.
• Erase back-up data – Erase the backup
data on the HDD.
Note
117
En
1 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Copying and backup
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW,
you cannot undo the finalization later.
8
If you don’t need to keep the backup
data on the HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD;
select No to keep it (you can delete it later if
you want to).
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary
so there may be cases where the
contents of the disc you’re backing-up
will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of
disc.
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up
to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW
discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/
+RW discs.
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
No
Yes
• If you decide to leave the backup data on
the HDD, you can make backup copies
to recordable DVD discs anytime from
the Disc Back-up menu.
6
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the
backed-up data to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Cancel
Start
• To see the progress of the backup, press
DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the backup process by
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more
than one second. However, this will
make the disc unusable (although if you
are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc
you can re-initialize it in order to make it
usable again—see Initializing recordable
DVD discs on page 80.)
7
After the recorder has finished
recording the backup disc, you can select
whether to make another backup of the
same data or exit.
Disc Back-up
Disc back-up finished.
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Cancel
Start
• Select Start to make another backup
copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to
make another backup copy, return to
step 6 above.
118
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Jukebox
12
Chapter 12
Using the Jukebox
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the
recorder’s HDD to store and playback
Important
1
• While copying CD audio, no other
recorder operation is possible.
• When copying CD audio, scheduled
timer recordings will not start until
copying is complete.
music from up to 999 of your CDs. You can
also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-
R/-RW/-ROM or USB device. Once on the
HDD, you can name albums, assign them a
genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to
play to Jump.
• Copy protected CDs may not copy
successfully.
Copying music to the HDD
1
Load the CD you want to copy to the
HDD.
The first step is to copy some music to the
HDD. CD audio is copied in real-time, while
WMA and MP3 files are copied at high
HOME MENU
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home
Menu.
2
speed. All tracks are copied from each CD
as an album.
ENTER
3
Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’.
WMA/MP3 album and track names are
copied along with the audio. CD album and
track names are not copied, but you can add
these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on
page 121).
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the
CD are copied to the HDD.
• You can also start copying by starting
playback of the CD (including program
play) and then pressing ONE TOUCH
COPY.
• To cancel copying an audio CD, press
and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more
than one second.
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in
the order they appear on the CD. When
copying CD audio, you can copy them in
some other order using the program play
mode. See Program play on page 90 for how
to do this.
• To cancel copying a WMA/MP3 disc,
press ENTER.
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio
tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD
disc.
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio
tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part
currently selected will play.
Note
1 DVR-940HX-S: You cannot use the external HDD to store music for the Jukebox.
2 The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps
Dolby Digital.
119
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Using the Jukebox
• Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit –
Listen to WMA or MP3 files that have
been stored on the HDD.
Copying files from a USB
device
• Listen to Music from USB device –
Listen to music from an external USB
device.
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a
connected USB device, such as a USB drive,
to the HDD.
1
Connect the USB device.
ENTER
3
Select what you want to play.
HOME MENU
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home
The screen below shows CD albums stored
on the HDD:
Menu.
Album name
ENTER
3
Select ‘Listen to Music from
Jukebox
10Albums
USB Device’.
3
4
Album1
Album2
ALL
1
Play
Erase
Edit
By number
5
6
7
8
9
Album3
Album4
Album5
Album6
Album7
2
ENTER
3
Play Mode
4
All Genres
4
Select ‘Copy Album’ from the
5
Genre Name
6
command menu panel.
7
10 Album8
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
HDD
1-10
ꢄ
0.03.58
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
Total 12 1.14.58
classical
ENTER
Remain
60h30m
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
Info for selected album
Playback status
to cancel.
The selected folder on the USB device will be
copied to the HDD.
• If you select a whole album to play, all
tracks that are not set to Jump will play.
• If you want to start playback from a
selected track in an album, or play a
track that is set to Jump, press ꢀ to
enter the track list then select a track to
play.
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB
device can be copied/displayed.
Playing music from the
Jukebox
• DVR-940HX-S: Press
SUBTITLE or
ANGLE to change the page.
You can select albums or individual tracks
from the Jukebox to play.
• DVR-545HX-S: Press SHIFT + SUBTITLE
or SHIFT + ANGLE to change the page.
1
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home
Menu.
ENTER
2
Select a Jukebox option.
• Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs
that have been copied to the HDD.
Note
120
En
1 The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Jukebox
12
Changing the album view
Editing Jukebox albums
A number of commands are available for
editing and changing the playback behavior
of albums.
1
From the album list, display
the view options menu panel.
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home
ENTER
Menu.
2
Select a view option.
ENTER
Jukebox
10Albums
2
Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’ or
ALL
1
Play
Sort
By number m2
‘Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit’.
Erase
Edit
By
By favorite
m3
m4
m5
m6
m7
m8
2
By album
Genr
3
Play Mode
4
A
Cancel
5
ENTER
Genre Name
6
3
Select what you want to edit.
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
HDD
1-10
ꢄ
0.03.58
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
Total 12 1.14.58
classical
Remain
60h30m
ENTER
4
Select an edit function from
• Sort order
the command menu panel.
By number – Albums are listed by the
album number.
• Erase – Erase the selected track (if all
tracks in an album are selected, the
whole album is erased).
By favorite – Most often listened to
music appears at the top of the list.
• Edit > Edit Title – Enter a name of up to
64 characters for the album. See page
Title Name on page 100 for how to enter
names.
By album – Albums are listed
alphabetically.
• Genre
• Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the
genre for the album.
Jukebox
10Albums
1
• Edit > Jump Set – Set a track to jump
Play
Erase
Edit
ALL
1
Sort
All Genres m2
By
No Category
so that it doesn't play (choose this
command again to cancel the Jump
setting).
• Play Mode – Change the playback order
for albums and tracks.
• Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12
characters for a genre. See page Title
Name on page 100 for how to enter
names.
m3
m4
m5
m6
m7
m8
2
Best
Rock
Pop
Genr
3
Play Mode
4
A
Jazz
5
Genre Name
Classical
6
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
Total 12 1.14.58
HDD
1-10
ꢄ
0.03.58
Remain
60h30m
All Genres – All albums are displayed.
Genre – Only albums in the selected
genre are displayed.
Note
121
En
1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
The PhotoViewer
Chapter 13
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG
photos and picture files stored on the HDD ,
1
ENTER
3
Select the folder containing
recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a
the files you want to view, copy or edit.
2
USB-equipped digital camera. You can also
import files and save them to the recorder’s
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.
Currently selected
folder in folder list
Currently selected File information
thumbnail
PhotoViewer
HDD
Locating JPEG picture files
File
Date/Time
Chair No.
10:00 24/01/2006
2
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
3
6
9
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
HOME MENU
4
7
1
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the
Home Menu.
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
ENTER
1/2
1/3
2
Select the location of the files
you want to view or edit.
Pages in
folder list
Incompatible/
unknown file
Pages in
file view
• If you encounter a disc that will not play,
check that the disc and file formats are
compatible with this recorder (see JPEG
file compatibility and PC-created disc
compatibility on page 11).
View/Edit photos on the HDD
View photos on
a
CD/DVD
View photos on
a
USB device
a USB device
Copy photos from
• View/Edit photos on the HDD – View
or edit photos already stored on the
recorder’s HDD.
• View photos on a CD/DVD – View
photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-
R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.
• View photos on a USB device – View
photos on a digital camera (or other USB
device) connected to the USB port.
• Copy photos from a USB device – Copy
all photos on a connected USB device to
the HDD.
Note
1 DVR-940HX-S: You cannot use the external HDD to store photos for the PhotoViewer.
2 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected
USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB
device on page 123).
122
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
13
• Large picture files may take a few
seconds to display. This is normal.
Playing a slideshow
• During playback of the slideshow you
can listen to WMA/MP3 files in the
Slideshow genre (see Editing Jukebox
albums on page 121).
ENTER
1
list.
Select a folder from the folder
STOP
The first nine images from the selected
folder are displayed as thumbnails in the
main part of the screen.
5
Press to return to the thumbnail
view area.
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes
the recorder to load the file.
• You can also use the RETURN/EXIT
button.
• To start the slideshow from the first file in
the folder, skip to step 4 after pressing
ENTER.
RETURN/EXIT
6
Press to return to the folder
view area.
• With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted,
you can use the ꢃ button.
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME
MENU.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Selection’ from the
menu.
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.
Reloading files from a disc or USB
device
• You can also select a folder, then press
ꢀ to get to the thumbnail view area.
• To get back to the folder list, press
RETURN/EXIT (or ꢃ when the leftmost
thumbnail is highlighted).
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files
and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the
images using the reload function.
3
4
Select a thumbnail.
• Use ꢇ PREV and ꢈ NEXT to display
the previous/next page of thumbnails.
1
Navigate to the last entry in
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
ENTER
2
Load the next batch of up to 999
ENTER
files/99 folders from the disc or
connected USB device.
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes)
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ from
the menu.
• You can also select a file or folder then
press ꢄ PLAY to start playing the
slideshow.
1
to load in the images.
• Use ꢇPREV / ꢈNEXT to display the
previous/next picture, or ꢆ PAUSE to
pause the slideshow.
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some
pictures may be displayed with black
bars top and bottom, or left and right.
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter
the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading if from a CD or DVD.)
123
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
The PhotoViewer
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 125.
Zooming an image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to
enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of
two or four. You can also move the area of
the picture displayed.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Selection’ from the
ENTER
1
Press during the slideshow to
menu.
zoom the picture.
3
Select a file to import, then press
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,
2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is
displayed on-screen.
ENTER
.
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 125.
2
Use to move the zoomed
ENTER
area.
4
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the
menu.
Rotating an image
You can rotate the displayed picture during a
slideshow so you can always view pictures
the right way up, whichever way they were
taken.
PhotoViewer
Chair No.
CD/DVD
File
2
Date/Time
10:00 24/01/2006
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow
Copy all to HDD
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
Copy to HDD
4
7
ANGLE
Print
Multi-Mode
•
•
DVR-940HX-S:
DVR-545HX-S:
Cancel
SHIFT
ANGLE
+
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/2
1/3
Press during the slideshow to rotate the
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the
picture in increments of 90º.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and
copy the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to
cancel.
• The files will be copied to the HDD with
Importing files to the HDD
the same folder structure as the original.
You can import files and save them on to the
HDD from a CD, DVD or a connected USB
camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and
organize your pictures and print them out if
you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible
printer.
• Importing to the HDD will not work if
there is insufficient space on the HDD,
or if there are already the maximum
number of files and/or folders on the
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).
1
ENTER
1
Select the location of folders/
files you want to import.
To import a whole folder, press ENTER here
and skip to step 4 below.
Note
124
En
1 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
13
Selecting multiple files or folders
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple
folders/files at once for importing or editing.
ENTER
5
Select the command you want
to apply to all the selected items.
ENTER
Importing files from a USB
device
1
Select the folder containing
the files you want to import.
Use this feature to copy all the files on a
connected USB device to this recorder’s
HDD.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the
menu.
PhotoViewer
12/13 WED
HDD
Important
Folder
• After backing up the pictures on your
USB device to HDD, we recommend
verifying that they have been recorded
properly before deleting anything from
the camera.
1
4
7
2
5
8
File selection
001. 12/12 TUE
Start Slideshow
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
New Folder
Folder Options
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Use [ꢆ][ꢇ] to select, then press [ꢄ] to
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.
1/2
1/3
ENTER
1
Select ‘Copy photos from a
USB device’ from the main PhotoViewer
menu.
ENTER
3
To add a file/folder to the list,
select it, then choose ‘Select’ from the
menu.
ENTER
A checkbox mark (ꢅ) is shown by the item
you selected.
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
• While the files are being imported, any
timer programs set to start will not
begin, and no other operation is
possible.
• You can also select a file or folder and
press ꢅ STOP to add it to the list.
• To remove a file/folder from the list,
select Cancel Selection from the menu.
PhotoViewer
Chair No.
HDD
Multi-Mode
File
2
Date/Time
10:00 24/01/2006
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
3
6
9
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
4
7
Press STOP or ENTER to display the menu
and cancel selection.
1/2
1/3
ENTER
4
Display the command menu.
125
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
The PhotoViewer
Copying selected files to a
DVD-R/-RW
ENTER
4
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
menu.
This feature allows you just to copy some of
the files stored on HDD to a DVD.
ENTER
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on
the disc as a Video mode title, making it
possible to view the photos on other DVD
players/recorders that may not be
compatible with JPEG file playback. Note
however that you may need to finalize the
disc before it will play on another DVD player
(copying selected files doesn’t automatically
finalize the disc).
5
to cancel.
• Folder names on the disc will be
number PIONR. File names will be
PHOT number.
• Note that during copying, any timer
programs set to start will not begin, and
no other operation is possible.
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can
press ENTER to cancel.
Important
Editing files on the HDD
• A maximum of 99 titles can be recorded.
• Slideshows can contain up to 99 files. If
there are more files than this in the
slideshow, multiple slideshows are
created on the disc.
There are a number of commands you can
use to edit and organize your pictures stored
on the HDD.
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD
the slideshow will become unplayable
but the free space will not increase.
Creating a new folder
ENTER
1
From the folder list, display the
1
Load a blank (or unfinalized Video
menu.
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
ENTER
ENTER
2
Select ‘New Folder’.
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder
list with the name F_number.
the HDD’ from the menu.
ENTER
PhotoViewer
12/13 WED
HDD
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s)
Folder
you want to copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files
1
4
7
2
5
8
File selection
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
Start Slideshow
New Folder
contained in it.
Folder Options
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 125.
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Use [ꢆ][ꢇ] to select, then press [ꢄ] to
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.
1/2
1/3
• There can be up to 999 folders on the
HDD.
126
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
13
Erasing a file or folder
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’
ENTER
to cancel.
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)
• You can also erase a file or folder by
pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is
highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.
you want to erase.
• To erase multiple folders, use the Multi-
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 125.
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files
contained in it. Please be careful!
Copying files
ENTER
• You can’t erase files that have been
locked.
• Folders containing locked files can’t be
erased. Unlocked files in the folder,
however, will be erased.
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)
you want to copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files
contained in it.
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 125.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder
PhotoViewer
Chair No.
HDD
Options’.
File
2
Date/Time
10:00 24/01/2006
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow
File Options
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
ENTER
Print
4
7
3
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Contents’.
Cancel
PhotoViewer
Chair No.
HDD
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/2
1/3
File
2
Date/Time
24/01/2006 10:00AM
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow
Erase
Copy
Rename Fil
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
ENTER
4
7
e
Lock
3
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.
Cancel
PhotoViewer
Chair No.
HDD
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
File
2
1/2
1/3
Date/Time
10:00 24/01/2006
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
Erase
Copy
4
7
Rename File
Lock
ENTER
4
Select a folder to copy the
folder(s)/file(s) to.
Cancel
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/2
1/3
127
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
The PhotoViewer
Locking/Unlocking files
Locking files will protect them from
accidental erasure and prevent them from
being renamed.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’
to cancel.
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there
is insufficient space on the HDD; if there
are already the maximum number of
files and/or folders on the HDD.
Use the same process to both lock and
unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the
PhotoViewer with a padlock icon.
ENTER
Naming files and folders
1
Select the file(s) you want to
1
Select the file or folder you want to
lock (or unlock).
rename.
• To lock/unlock multiple folders, use the
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files
or folders on page 125.
You can’t rename files that have been
locked.
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder
3
Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename
Options’.
Folder’.
PhotoViewer
Chair No.
HDD
ENTER
File
2
3
Date/Time
10:00 24/01/2006
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
Contents’.
Start Slideshow
Erase
Copy
Rename Fil
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
4
7
e
PhotoViewer
Chair No.
HDD
Lock
File
2
Date/Time
10:00 24/01/2006
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
Cancel
Sat Slieso
Erase
Copy
Rename Fil
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/2
1/3
4
7
e
Lock
4
Enter a new name for the file/folder.
Filenames or Foldernames can be up to 64
characters long.
Cancel
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/2
1/3
See Using the remote key shortcuts to input
a name on page 101 for how to enter a name.
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon
next to them.
128
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
Printing files
13
Tip
• Paper size and layout can be set; the
options available depend on your
printer—check the printer manual for
details.
• If the message Searching for printer.
Please wait a moment continues to be
displayed, try disconnecting then
reconnecting the USB cable.
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer
to the USB port will enable you to print out
picture files stored on the HDD, or directly
1
from a digital camera.
Make sure that the printer (and your digital
camera if you are using that as a source) is
connected to the recorder before starting.
• This recorder may not work correctly
with all printers.
ENTER
1
Select the file(s) you want to
print.
• To print multiple folders, use the Multi-
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 125.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer
Chair No.
HDD
File
2
Date/Time
10:00 24/01/2006
x
Size
1920 1440
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow
File Options
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
Print
4
7
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/2
1/3
It takes a moment for the recorder to
communicate with the printer. During this
time you can press ENTER to cancel the
print.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or
‘Cancel’ to cancel.
• Once printing has started, you can
cancel by pressing ENTER.
Note
129
En
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
The Disc Setup menu
Chapter 14
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name
discs, lock the contents to prevent
• See Title Name on page 100 for more on
navigating the input screen.
accidental recording and erasure, initialize
and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu:
Lock Disc
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Basic settings
• Default setting: Off
Locking the disc will prevent accidental
recording, editing or erasing of the disc.
Input Disc Name
Important
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
• A locked disc can still be initialized
(which will completely erase the disc).
When you initialize a disc for recording, the
recorder automatically assigns a name for
the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You
can use the Input Disc Name function to
change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when
you load the disc and when you display disc
information on-screen.
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock disc’ then
‘On’ or ‘Off’.
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
Disc Setup
On
Off
Basic
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Initialize
Finalize
ENTER
Optimize HDD
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc
Name’ > ‘Next Screen’.
Disc Setup
Set to On to prevent accidental recording,
editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you
need to unlock the disc to make edits, select
Off.
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Next Screen
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
ENTER
3
Input a name for the disc.
The disc name can be up to 64 characters
long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video
mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.
130
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Disc Setup menu
Initialize settings
14
Finalize settings
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Finalize
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW
disc for either VR mode or Video mode
recording.
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so
that the disc can be played on a regular DVD
player or computer equipped with a suitable
DVD-ROM drive.
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc,
it will be automatically initialized for
recording according to the DVD-RW Auto
Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 146).
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs.
This is only necessary if you want to a player
to display a title menu for the disc.
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode
recording when you load them, but it is also
possible to initialize them for VR mode
See Playing your recordings on other DVD
players on page 78 for detailed instructions.
1
recording.
Undo Finalize
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be
initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc.
When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR
mode.
DVD-RW
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW
discs recorded on this recorder in Video
mode. You need to do this if you want to
record more material or edit material already
on the disc.
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 80 for detailed instructions.
You can also undo the finalization of VR
mode discs which have been finalized on
other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc
the message This disc cannot be recorded.
Undo the finalization is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc
using this recorder.
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo
Finalize’ then ‘Start’.
Note
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also,
once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.
131
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
The Disc Setup menu
Optimize HDD
HDD
Initialize HDD
HDD
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the
HDD file system gradually becomes
fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need
optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
When your DVD recorder is working without
a problem this option is not visible in the
Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file
system becomes corrupted for some reason,
you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem.
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all
the data on it.
When the HDD needs optimizing the
recorder will automatically display a
message recommending optimization.
DVR-940HX-S: If you connect an external
HDD that this recorder cannot use, the
Initialize HDD option is displayed. When
using an external HDD for the first time, or
when using one that was being used with
another recorder, you’ll need to initialize it
before use.
Important
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as
eight hours. During optimization,
playback and recording are not possible.
• Canceling optimization mid-way does
not undo the optimization already done,
so the HDD will be partly optimized.
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
Home Menu.
HOME MENU
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the
ENTER
Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ or
(DVR-940HX-S only) ‘Initialize HDD2’ then
‘Start’.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ or
Disc Setup
(DVR-940HX-S only) ‘Optimize HDD2’ then
Start
Start
Basic
Initialize HDD
Initialize HDD2
‘Start’.
Initialize
Finalize
InitializeHDD
Disc Setup
Start
Start
Basic
Optimize HDD
Optimize HDD2
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
DVR-940HX-S screen
DVR-940HX-S screen
A progress bar indicates how long there is
left to go.
132
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video Adjust menu
15
Chapter 15
The Video Adjust menu
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up
the picture quality for the built-in tuner and
external inputs, for disc playback, and for
recording.
There are six presets available:
• Tuner – suitable for general TV
broadcasts
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital
broadcasts and Laserdiscs
Setting the picture quality
for TV and external inputs
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual
settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR
or DTV/LDP).
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of
picture quality settings for the built-in TV
tuner and for each external input. There are
several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your
own sets.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you
can save your own set of picture quality
settings.
Choosing a preset
HOME MENU
1
With the recorder stopped,
press to display the Home Menu.
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,
2 or 3).
ENTER
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
• Select the DV input by selecting DV then
DV Video Setting from the Home
Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Pr 1
Memory1
ENTER
Detailed Settings
Select a preset.
Pr 1
Tuner
Detailed Settings
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch
between the built-in TV tuner and the
external inputs (not possible if you
selected DV Video Setting in step 2
(above)).
• Use the ꢇ PREV/ꢈ NEXT buttons to
change the channel of the built-in TV
tuner.
133
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
The Video Adjust menu
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the
colours appear.
ENTER
3
Select the setting you want to
adjust.
ENTER
4
Adjust the currently selected
Memory1
Pr
1
setting.
Prog. Motion
PureCinma
3-D Y/C
Motion
Still
HOME MENU
Auto1
5
Press to exit.
Motion
Off
Still
Max
Max
You can now use the preset for any other
input or the built-in TV tuner.
YNR
CNR
Off
White AGC
White Level
Off
Min
Max
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust
different settings, press ENTER after
selecting the setting you want to adjust.
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and
still picture quality when video output is
set to progressive.
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the
picture for film material when the video
output is set to progressive. Usually set
to Auto; but try switching to Off if the
picture appears unnatural.
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness /
colour separation (NTSC video input
only).
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the Y
(brightness) component.
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)
component.
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic
1
white level adjustment.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of
white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of
black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard
reference black level (NTSC video input
only).
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between
red and green.
Note
134
En
1 When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video Adjust menu
15
Creating your own set
Setting the picture quality
for disc playback
There are three user presets in which you
can save your own set of picture quality
settings for disc playback.
This setting determines how the picture will
look when playing discs.
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,
2 or 3).
Choosing a preset
2
Move the cursor down and select
HOME MENU
1
With a disc playing (or paused),
‘Detailed Settings’.
press to display the Home Menu.
Memory1
ENTER
Detailed Settings
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
Select a setting.
3
Select the picture quality setting you
ENTER
want to adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
PureCinma
Subtitle Adjust
YNR
Motion
Still
TV
Detailed Settings
Auto1
On
Off
Off
Max
Max
Max
Max
There are six presets available:
CNR
• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray
BNR
Off
tube TVs
MNR
Min
• PDP – suitable for plasma display
screens
You can adjust the following settings:
• Professional – suitable for professional
monitors
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and
still picture quality when video output is
set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual
settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or
Professional).
ineffective when PureCinema is On.)
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the
picture for film material when the video
output is set to progressive. Usually set
to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2,
On or Off if the picture appears
unnatural.
• Subtitle Adjust – When the video
output is set to progressive scan, it’s
possible that the subtitles in some
movies will disappear unnaturally. In this
case select the On setting (only possible
when connected using HDMI).
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the Y
(brightness) component.
135
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
The Video Adjust menu
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)
component (only possible when
connected using HDMI).
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the block noise
(artefacts visible in areas of flat colour,
caused by MPEG compression).
• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito
noise (artefacts visible around the edges
of an image, caused by MPEG
compression).
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust
different settings, press ENTER after
selecting the setting you want to adjust.
• YNR and Detail are ineffective for analog
and component video when the Video
Priority Mode is set to HDMI. Set to
Component to make effective for both
analog and HDMI video. See page 149.
• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of
the high-frequency (detailed) elements
in the picture.
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges
appear.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of
white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of
black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard
reference black level (NTSC video
playback on the Interlace video output
setting only). (Black Setup is ineffective
for HDMI output.)
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the
brightness of darker images.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between
red and green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the
colours appear.
4
Use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to adjust the
currently selected picture quality setting.
5
When you have all the settings as you
want them, press HOME MENU to exit.
136
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
16
Chapter 16
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture,
language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and
recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of
inactivity.
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting
Options
Explanation
Basic
Clock Setting
Auto
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and
the clock will be set automatically.
Manual •
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal
in your area, you can set the time and date manually.
• If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set.
• The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System
525 System
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external
input.
625 System •
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
• This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input.
• See also About the input line system on page 150 for more information on this setting.
Power Save
Mode 1
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed
through to the antenna output when the recorder is
in standby.
Mode 2
Off •
No input signals are passed through to the outputs
when the recorder is in standby.
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving
at the SCART and antenna inputs are passed along
to the outputs.
137
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
On •
Explanation
HELP Setting
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI
displays.
Off
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI
displays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually
display the Help screen.)
EPG Type Select
Pause Live TV
GUIDE Plus+
Digital EPG
Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG.
Use the EPG based on information provided by D.TV
broadcasts.
TV’s Tuner •
Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an
AV Link-compatible TV connected by SCART cable.
Recorder’s Tuner Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s
internal TV tuner.
See also Pause Live TV on page 75 for more information on this setting.
Setup Navigator
Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also
Switching on and setting up on page 36.
Digital Tuner
Replace Channels
Next Screen
Scans for digital channels and replaces all the
channel presets with the results. Before the scan
starts you will need to select your country.
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you
whether any new channels were found, and if so,
how many.
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by
pressing HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT. In this
case, no channels are set.)
If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased.
Add New Channels Next Screen
Automatically scans for new digital channels.
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you
whether any new channels were found, and if so,
how many.
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by
pressing HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT. In this
case, no new channels are set.)
138
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
16
Setting
Options
Explanation
Channel Sort
Next Screen
Use this screen to sort channel presets into your
prefered order. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to
highlight the channel you want to move, press
ENTER. Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the
position you want to move the channel preset to,
then press ENTER again.
(If there are more channel presets than will fit on one
screen, you can select the next/previous page by
highlighting the small triangular marks and pressing
ENTER.)
Channel Options
Next Screen
From this screen you can skip or lock channels.
Locked channels will require the correct password to
be entered before the channel can be watched. Use
the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to highlight a preference box
and press ENTER to toggle the preference.
To enter this screen, input the parental lock password
when prompted (if one has not yet been set then the
password you enter becomes the parental lock
password).
Auto Skip
Off •
No channels are automatically skipped.
Radio
Radio channels are skipped when selecting
channels.
Data
Data channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Radio & Data
Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting
channels.
Signal Check
Aerial Power
Next Screen
Use this screen to check the signal level and quality
of digital channels. Use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to change
the RF channel; select Add New Channels then
press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME
MENU to exit.
On
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna)
when this recorder is on or in standby.
Auto
Off •
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna)
only when this recorder is on.
This recorder does not supply power to the
connected aerial (antenna).
• If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto, the aerial may not be connected properly,
or it may be shorted. In either case, check the connection and try making the setting again.
139
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
D.TV Language
Next Screen
From this screen you can set your Primary and
Secondary Audio preference for multilingual digital
broadcasts, and your Primary and Secondary
Subtitle preference for programs that are broadcast
with subtitles. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ buttons to highlight a
field then use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to change it.
Analog Tuner
Auto Channel
Setting
Auto Scan
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to
auto tune into channels in your area. After auto scan
has finished, the channel mapping screen appears
showing which channels have been assigned to
which program numbers. You can skip unwanted
channels using the Manual CH Setting option below.
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping
screen.
Download from
TV
If your TV supports this feature you can download all
the channels that your TV is tuned to via the SCART
input. Select your country and then wait for the
download to complete. After the download is
complete, the channel mapping screen appears, as
above.
See also the operating instructions that came with
your TV for more information.
Manual CH Setting Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any
of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your
country, then proceed to the manual channel setting
screen:
• Change channel presets using the ꢇ PREV/
ꢈ NEXT buttons.
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no
station assigned to that channel), change the Skip
setting to On.
• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel
system of your country or region.
• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want
to assign to the current channel preset.
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT
setting to Off then adjust the Level setting.
• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound
system of your region.
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to
five characters for the current channel preset.
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled
requiring a decoder connected to the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On.
140
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
16
Setting
Options
Explanation
Channel Swapping Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel
assignments of different presets so that you can
group together presets that naturally go together.
Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.
Video In/Out
Input Colour
System
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour
system for the external input and the built-in TV
tuner. Use the Smart Jog (DVR-940HX-S) or ꢇ
PREV/ꢈ NEXT (DVR-545HX-S) or INPUT SELECT
buttons to change the preset or external input. On
the default Auto setting the recorder can generally
correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL,
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you
may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed
incorrectly.
• Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode.
• See also About the input colour system on page 151 for more information on this setting.
Component Video Interlace •
Out
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with
progressive-scan video.
Progressive
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan
compatible. Check the operating instructions that
came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.
For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see below) must be set to something other than RGB.
If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any
picture at all. In this case, press ONE TOUCH COPY while holding down the ꢅ (STOP) button on the front
panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 148 to the default setting).
When an HDMI device is connected and Video Priority Mode is set to HDMI, the Component Video Out setting
is automatically set to Interlace.
AV1 Out
Video •
S-Video
RGB
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to standard
composite video (compatible with all TVs).
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video.
Recommended if you are using a long SCART cable.
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good
quality but check your TV for compatibility. Note that
on this setting signals from the built-in tuner and
from external inputs is not output when the recorder
is in TV mode.
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case
either switch off and reconnect using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on
page 167).
The Component Video Out setting (see above) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB.
141
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Video •
Explanation
AV2/L1 In
Sets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to
standard composite video.
S-Video
RGB
Sets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-
video.
Sets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to
RGB.
Decoder
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector. For
scrambled channels, make sure that the channel
Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting
page 140.)
When the Input Line System is set to 525 System, RGB cannot be selected.
Even when set to RGB. depending on the connected device, the input signal may be composite video.
NTSC on PAL TV
On •
Off
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating
instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 151 for related information.
Audio In
NICAM Select
NICAM •
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular Audio
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
(You can still switch the audio to record using the
AUDIO button before recording.)
Analog Tuner Level Normal •
Compression
Standard setting.
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is exces-
sive, causing distortion.
External Audio
Stereo •
Bilingual
Select if the audio from the currently selected exter-
nal input is standard stereo.
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder
whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Bilingual Recording A/L •
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source
when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format
set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in
LPCM mode, from an external source.
B/R
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format
set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you
want on playback.
142
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
16
Setting
Options
Explanation
DV Input
Stereo 1 •
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during
the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two
stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2
Mix
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a
camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the
two stereo audio tracks.
Audio Out
Dolby Digital Out
Dolby Digital •
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital
source is being played.
Dolby Digital ꢄ Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output.
PCM
On •
Off
Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have a
Dolby Digital decoder.
DTS Out
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being
played.
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is
being played. Use when your connected equipment
doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the
analog audio outputs.
96 kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
96 kHz ꢄ 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz out-
put. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t sup-
port 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHz
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is
being played.
MPEG
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using
MPEG audio is being played.
MPEG ꢄ PCM •
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM out-
put. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have
an MPEG audio decoder.
Audio DRC
On
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control).
Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low
volume.
Off •
Switches off Audio DRC.
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby
Digital.
143
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Language
OSD Language
English •
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to
English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-
screen displays.
On Screen Display and D.TV Language will both reflect this setting.
Audio Language
English •
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video play-
back to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the
default audio language for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default audio language to some-
thing other than the ones listed. See Selecting other
languages for language options on page 151.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language
preference.
Subtitle Language English •
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video
playback to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the
default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to some-
thing other than the ones listed. See Selecting other
languages for language options on page 151.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle
Language preference.
Auto Language
On •
On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your
default language will play using that language, with-
out subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default
language but that have a subtitle track in your default
language will play the original audio track with subti-
tles.
Off
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your
audio and subtitle language preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same
language.
144
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
16
Setting
Options
Explanation
DVD Menu
Language
w/Subtitle
Language •
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same
as that set for the subtitle language.
English
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the
default language for DVD-Video menus.
Other
Select to set the DVD menu language to something
other than the ones listed. See Selecting other lan-
guages for language options on page 151.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle Display
On •
Select to have discs display subtitles according to
your Subtitle Language and Auto Language prefer-
ences.
Off
Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist Subtitle
Select to display special additional assistive subti-
tles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
Recording
Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to
MN32 and LPCM modes can be set.
Off •
Justthestandardrecordingmodes(XP,SP,LP, EP,SLP
and SEP) can be set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 155 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec
On
The recording quality of timer recordings is automati-
cally adjusted to fit on to the selected media if it will
not fit at the selected quality setting. If the recording
will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW),
then the recording will start at MN1 and stop when
all the available space is used up.
Off •
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the
selected media, the recording starts but is cut off
when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be
used together with VPS/PDC.
Subtitle Recording On
The selected subtitle language is recorded with the
D.TV timer recording.
Off •
No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings.
145
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Set Thumbnail
0 seconds •
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc
Navigator to the first frame of the title.
30 seconds
3 minutes
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into
the title.
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into
the title.
Auto Chapter
(Video)
No Separation
10 minutes •
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are
inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.
Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)
No Separation
10 minutes •
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers
are inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
DVD-RW Auto Init. VR Mode •
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode
recording when loaded into the recorder for the first
time.
Video Mode
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode
recording.
HDD Recording
Format
Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode.
Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the
recording later to a Video mode DVD.
Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with
Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if
you want to transfer the recording to a Video mode
DVD as high-speed copy can be used.
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual
broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on
playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 142.
146
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
16
Setting
Options
Explanation
Playback
TV Screen Size
4:3 (Letter Box)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the let-
ter box format presentation for widescreen material.
4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the
pan and scan presentation for widescreen material.
16:9 •
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV set-
tings determine how 4:3 material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that
format as some discs override this setting.
Still Picture
Field
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Frame
Auto •
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still
image.
Seamless Playback On
Off •
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the
accuracy of the edit points.
You may notice momentary interruption at edited
points during playback of a VR mode Play List.
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.
Angle Indicator
On •
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle
scenes on a DVD-Video disc.
Off
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle
scene is showing.
Parental Lock
Set Password /
Change Password
Next Screen
If no password has yet been set, enter a four digit
number to become your password. If you want to
change the password, first enter your old password,
then enter a new one.
DVD Playback
D.TV Age Limit
Next Screen
Next Screen
From this screen, first enter your password and then
set a parental lock level for playback of DVDs with
parental level coding.
Use this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV pro-
grams. Programs that are broadcast with age suit-
ability guidelines that fall above the age set here will
require the correct password to be entered before the
channel can be viewed.
You must also enter your password in order to
change the age limit setting.
This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden.
147
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)
Screen Resolution
1920 x 1080p
(DVR-940HX-S only)
Constant 1920 x 1080p output.
1920 x 1080i
1280 x 720p
720 x 576p
Constant 1920 x 1080i output.
Constant 1280 x 720p output.
Constant 720 x 576p output (for use with the 625
input line system).
720 x 480p
720 x 576i
720 x 480i
Constant 720 x 480p output (for use with the 525
input line system).
Constant 720 x 576i output (for use with the 625 input
line system).
Constant 720 x 480i output (for use with the 525 input
line system).
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case,
press ONE TOUCH COPY while holding down the ꢅ (STOP) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this
also switches Component Video Out on page 141 to the default setting).
4:3 Video Output
Full
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the
aspect ratio.
Normal
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change
the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on
each side (unless the Screen Resolution setting
(above) is set to 720 x 480i or 720 x 576i).
Colour
RGB (0–255)
RGB (16–235)
YCbCr 4:2:2
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’
on the RGB (16–235) setting.
Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the
black too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting.
The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2
component signal. This is the standard setting for
HDMI-compatible devices.
YCbCr 4:4:4
The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4 com-
ponent signal.
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.
148
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
16
Setting
Options
Auto •
Explanation
Audio Output
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as
a bitstream signal. However, depending on the
Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and
the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may
be output.
PCM
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM
(except DTS).
Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bit-
stream audio.
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.
Video Priority Mode HDMI • Select for high quality picture output on a connected
HDMI display. However, on this setting the YNR and
Detail picture quality settings are not effective for
analog video, and component video will be set to
interlaced.
Component
Select if you want the YNR and Detail picture quality
settings to be effective for both HDMI and analog
video output, or if Component Video Out is set to
Progressive while an HDMI display is connected
(page 141).
When watching video on an HDMI display, use the
HDMI setting.
Options
On Screen Display On •
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play,
etc.) on-screen.
Off
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
Front Panel Display On •
The time is shown in the front panel display when the
recorder is in standby.
Off
The front panel display is switched off in standby
(although it still lights dimly when setting a timer
recording).
Remote Control
Mode
Recorder 1–3
If you are using more than one recorder in the same
(default: Recorder 1) room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the
recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID,
press and hold RETURN/EXIT then press 1, 2 or 3 to
set. The remote will only control a recorder with the
same ID.
149
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
AV. Link
Options
Explanation
This Recorder
Only •
Signals received through the AV input when the
recorder is in standby are not passed through to the
AV output.
Pass Through
Signals received when in standby are passed though
to the output for connected devices. (Note that dur-
ing EPG data download, the EPG data is not passed
through.)
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 137) to Off.
DivX VOD
Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code.
See DivX video compatibility on page 10 and DivX®
VOD content on page 11.
Set Preview
(HDD only)
Quick Preview • When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video
plays short excerpts from throughout the selected
title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally
from the beginning.)
Normal
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the
title.
CI Information
Next Screen
This option displays a menu of CI card functions.
Consult your service provider for more information
on the functions available.
Software Update
Next Screen
The Software Update function can check for and
download updated system software for the digital
tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on
page 152.
• If, when the Input Line System setting is
changed, the screen goes blank (due to
incompatibility with your TV), you can
switch back by pressing and holding the
front panel ꢅSTOP button then pressing
INPUT SELECT (also front panel) while
the recorder is stopped.
• When you switch the Input Line System
setting the Copy List is erased. If you
switch the setting using the ꢅ STOP
button and INPUT SELECT buttons as
described above, there is no
Additional information about the
TV system settings
About the input line system
This recorder is compatible with PAL,
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems.
The Input Line System and Input Colour
System settings determine how the recorder
treats incoming video signals from an
external input.
Please note the following points when
changing the input line system:
confirmation, so please use with care.
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV
line systems on the same disc.
• When you change this setting, the Input
Colour System setting also changes
(see below).
• When the current input is a built-in tuner
channel preset, changing the input line
system will usually also affect the input
line system of the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1
In setting is set to Decoder, then the L2
input is affected instead.
150
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
16
About NTSC on PAL TV
Selecting other languages
for language options
Depending on the Input Line System setting
and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal
format output when the recorder is stopped
varies as shown in the table below.
ENTER
Output
when
stopped
Input Line
System
NTSC on PAL
TV
1
Select ‘Other’ from the
language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD
Menu Language, Audio Language, and
Subtitle Language.
625 System
Off
On
Off
On
PAL
PAL
525 System
NTSC
PAL–60
ENTER
2
Select the language you
want.
About the input colour system
The available options of the Input Colour
System setting depend on the Input Line
System setting. The table below shows the
different options available.
Initial Setup
Basic
OSD
DVD Menu Language
Digital Tuner
Analogue Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audi
Language
English
Subt
0
1
4
Number
Auto
5
DVD
Subt
Language
Input Line
System
Built-in
analog tuner input
External
Language
Recording
625 System
Auto
PAL
Auto
• Select by language name: Use the ꢃ/ꢀ
buttons to change the language.
PAL
• Select by code number: Press ꢂ then
use the number buttons to enter the
four-digit language code.
SECAM
n/a
SECAM
Auto
525 System
See Language code list on page 164 for a list
of available languages and corresponding
codes.
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
Additional information about
component video output
If you switch the Component Video Out
setting to Progressive when using a TV that
is not compatible with progressive-scan
video, you will not be able to see anything
displayed on your TV. If this happens, press
and hold the ꢅ STOP button on the front
panel, then press ONE TOUCH COPY. This
will set the recorder’s video output back to
Interlace.
151
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The Initial Setup menu
Auto Update
Using Software Update
(Digital tuner)
By default, the Auto Update option is On,
which means that periodically the recorder
will check for and update the digital tuner
software if it’s available. We recommend
that you leave this option On.
The Software Update function can keep the
built-in digital tuner up to date with the latest
system software. You can either check for
updates manually, or have the recorder do it
automatically at regular intervals.
If new software is found and successfully
downloaded, the recorder automatically
scans for new digital channels, informing
you if any are found (this is the equivalent of
using the Add New Channel option, found in
the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup
menu).
Access the Software Update screen from the
Options menu.
There are three options available: Manual
Update, Auto Update and Technical
Information.
Technical Information
This displays the current hardware and
software version numbers of the digital
tuner.
Manual Update
Select Manual Update to check for updated
software immediately. If new software is
found then it is automatically downloaded
and installed. The new software will take
effect the next time the recorder is powered
on.
If for some reason the new software could
not be downloaded successfully, a dialog
box informs you of the error. Press HOME
MENU to exit or RETURN/EXIT to return to
the previous screen.
Note that channel information may be
erased when software update is used, and
that timer recording will not work during the
update.
To cancel manual update before it has
completed, press HOME MENU.
152
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
17
Chapter 17
Additional information
Setting up the remote to
Maker
Alba
Code
66
control your TV
(DVR-940HX-S)
Bush
76
You can use the supplied remote to control
your TV. To be able to use this feature you
first have to program the remote with a
maker code from the table below.
Finlux
84
Fisher
61, 65
77
Fujitsu
Funai
67
1
Press and hold down the CLEAR
Goldstar
Grandiente
Grundig
Hitachi
ITT
79
button, then enter the maker code for
your TV.
87
51, 82
56, 60, 83, 86
70
See the table on the following page for the
list of maker codes. If there is more than one
code given for your make, input the first one
in the list.
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t
appear in the table below, you will not be
able to use this remote to control your
TV.
Mitsubishi
Nokia
59
53, 81
58, 72
57, 85
50, 80
68
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
2
Press ꢃ to check that the remote
works with your TV.
Salora
Samsung
Sanyo
71
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV
should switch on/off. If it doesn’t and there is
another code given for your maker, repeat
step 1 with a new code.
73, 75
74
Sei
78
Sharp
52
Sony
54
Using the TV remote control
buttons
The table below shows how to use this
remote control with your TV.
Tandy
69
Telefunken
Thomson
Toshiba
JVC
64
62
55
63
Button
What it does
ꢃ
Press to switch the TV on/off
(standby)
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video
input
VOLUME +/– Use to adjust the TV volume
CHANNEL +/– Use to change TV channels
153
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum internal HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
1
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc
manufacturer for compatibility.
DVD disc type
DVD-R / 4x
DVD-RW / 4x
DVD+R / 4x
DVD+RW / 4x
DVD-R / 8x / 16x
DVD-RW / 6x
DVD+R / 8x / 16x
DVD+RW / 8x
DVD-RW / 2x
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM / 2x
DVD+R / 2.4x
DVD+RW / 2.4x DVD-RAM / 5x
DVD+R DL
DVD-RAM / 3x
Rec
mode
DVD-R / 1x
DVD-RW / 1x
1x
2x
2.4x
*1
3x
4x
6x
SEP 10 h
SLP 8 h
EP 6 h
LP 4 h
SP 2 h
XP 1 h
6 mins.
7.5 mins.
10 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
60 mins.
3 mins.
4 mins.
5 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
2 mins.
2.5 mins.
3.5 mins.
5 mins.
10 mins.
20 mins.
1.5 mins.*1 1.25 mins.*1
2 mins.*1 1.6 mins.*1
2.5 mins.*1 2.2 mins.*1
*1
*1
6.3 mins.
12.5 mins.
25 mins.
4 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
3 mins.
5.5 mins.
11 mins.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc
being recorded.
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may
be made at 2x speed).
154
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Manual recording modes
17
The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD
types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents.
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode Off (HDD)
Video mode (DVD),
VR mode (DVD)
DVD+R/+RW
Resolution*1
Resolution*1
Level
Rec. time
Level
Rec. time
MN 1 *2,3
MN 2 *2,3
MN 3 *2,3
MN 4 *3
MN 5 *3
MN 6 *3
MN 7
MN 8
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
MN 1
MN 2
MN 3
MN 4
MN 5
MN 6
802 mins.
720 mins.
600 mins.
480 mins.
420 mins.
360 mins.
802 mins.
720 mins.
600 mins.
480 mins.
420 mins.
360 mins.
SEP
SLP
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
EP
LP
352 x 480 / MN 7
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
300 mins. 352 x 480 /
352 x 576
352 x 576
MN 8
MN 9
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
480 x 480 /
480 x 576
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
544 x 480 /
544 x 576
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
SP
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
XP
*1 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
*2 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.
*3 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.
155
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
•
Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.
•
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is
in Linear PCM format.
•
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space
(equivalent to one recordable DVD).
• See also Recording on page 66.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is
something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the
trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical
appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem
Remedy
The disc is
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 8).
automatically ejected • Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-
after closing the disc
tray
side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 166).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 8).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 166).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-
side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for
an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a
Line System different to the current recorder setting.
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-
once protected recordings will not play in this recorder.
Can’t record a disc
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 8).
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been
initialized (page 80). This can take up to 1 hour.
156
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
17
Problem
Remedy
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 14).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to
the correct input.
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible
TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel ꢅ STOP
button then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY.
• If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure
that Aerial Power in the Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto
(page 139).
• If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the
Aerial Power setting will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial
connection and try making the setting again.
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the
recorder is on, all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before
unplugging the power cord.
Remote control does
not work
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the
CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to
use (page 14).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder
(page 149). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is
automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 7).
• Replace the batteries (page 6).
No sound or sound is
distorted
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and
the volume turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or
slow motion play. Press ꢄ PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS
decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a
suitable decoder, also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out >
DTS Out setting is On.
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In
this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 14).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
Cannot switch a bilin- • During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels.
gual program
The main and sub channels are both output.
The picture from the
external input is
distorted
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected,
you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly
to your TV.
The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 150). (You can also
change it by pressing the ꢅ STOP button and INPUT SELECT on the
front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)
157
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
Screen is stretched
vertically or
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 147) is correct for
the kind of TV you have (see also page 165).
horizontally
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically
according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not
compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
Can’t play a disc
recorded using this
recorder on another
player
• If the disc was recorded in Video mode or DVD+R, make sure that
it’s finalized (page 79).
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when
recorded in Video mode and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be
specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 7).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-
CPRM compatible players (page 68).
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded
material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.
During playback the
picture is dark or dis-
torted
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not
display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can’t record or does
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
not record successfully • For a Video mode disc or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already
finalized.
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:
– Internal HDD: 999 titles / External HDD: 999 titles
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254
chapters per disc)
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 130).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC,
etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc
must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also
necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want
to record (page 150).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer program doesn’t • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the
record successfully
recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once
protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-
once material (page 68).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the
earlier one will record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
158
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
17
Problem
Remedy
After briefly unplug-
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other
ging or after a power settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After
failure the front panel unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for a
display shows ‘--:--’
period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings
to use the recorder again.
Front panel display
shows ‘LOCK’ when a
button is pressed
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 56).
Can’t use One Touch
Copy (HDD to DVD)
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some
free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc.
Also make sure that for a Video mode disc or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t
finalized.
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some
free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of
remaining recordable titles may not decrease.
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that
there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once
protected, One Touch Copy will not work.
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over 8 hours long when
copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles
when copying to DVD+R/+RW.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to
DVD.
Can’t use One Touch
Copy (DVD to HDD)
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there
are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to
the HDD.
• DVR-940HX-S: One Touch Copy cannot be used to copy from DVD to
the external HDD (HDD2).
The picture freezes and • Press ꢅ STOP then try restarting playback.
the front panel and
• Press the front panel ꢃ STANDBY/ON button to switch the power
remote control buttons off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to
stop working
switch off, press and hold ꢃ STANDBY/ON for 5 seconds until the
power switches off.
A device connected via • Check that it is a device that may be connected to this unit (digital
USB does to function. camera, USB memory, memory card reader or printer).
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.
• Check that the USB device is powered on.
• Only the first digital camera, USB memory or memory card reader
connected is readable by this unit. Unplug multiple devices and
connect the device you want to use first.
159
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
HDMI
Problem
Remedy
The connected HDMI or • Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the
DVI device does not
display any picture
(and the front panel
HDMI indicator does
not light)
power of both components is on).
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next,
switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds,
then switch on this recorder.
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the
following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-
standard cable may result in no picture being output.
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single
cable to connect devices together.
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the
following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x
720p, 1920 x 1080i, 1920 x 1080p (DVR-940HX-S only)) and PAL (720 x
576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i, 1920 x 1080p (DVR-940HX-S only))
video input.
• If the HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output.
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.
No video from the
HDMI output.
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not
be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press ONE TOUCH COPY
while holding down the ꢅ (STOP) button on the front panel to switch
the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 141 to
the default setting).
There’s no sound from • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.
the connected HDMI or • Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with
DVI device.
the manual that came with the connected device).
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect
the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
160
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
17
On-screen displays and recorder displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a
moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,
the recorder automatically initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region
number for the recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management
data.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or
the maximum number of chapters and/or titles
has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or
combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo
the finalization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD
recorder. Undo the finalization in order to
recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to
the disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the
disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a
new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc,
please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization
successfully.
• Could not undo finalization
successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the
disc.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This
display may also appear if the disc is dirty or
damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not
CPRM compatible.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR
mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.
• Cannot record this content using
Video mode recording.
• This video cannot be recorded to
DVD+R/+RW.
• This content is copy protected.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be
recorded.
161
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
Message
Explanation/Action
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The recorder could not read the CPRM
information. The recorder may be damaged—
please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Repairing disc.
• Repairing the HDD.
During recording, the power was cut. This display
appears when the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a
power cut. The contents of the recording will be
lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has
exceeded the operating limit. If this message
reappears, please contact a Pioneer authorized
service center.
• HDD optimization is recommended.
This can be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD
housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording
performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization.
This can be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in
order to maintain performance.
• The HDD has not been sufficiently
optimized. Please optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after
optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not
enough free space on the HDD for optimization to
complete properly. Please erase some titles from
the HDD and optimize again.
• This channel’s TV system is different
from the recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current
channel is different from the TV system settings of
this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system
mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear
message.
The timer recording failed because the TV system
of the channel set for recording was different from
the setting of the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV During recording or timer recording standby, the
system is different than the recording.
TV System (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video
changed, causing playback to stop automatically.
• You are not allowed to watch this
Conditional Access Program.
A CA module or smart card (obtained from your
service provider) is required to watch the selected
program. Insert the supplied module or card into
the Common Interface card slot on the rear of the
recorder (page 15).
• There is no DV input or the input sig- No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may
nal is unrecordable.
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in
the connected camcorder.
162
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
17
Message
Explanation/Action
• No DV camcorder connected.
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the
camcorder is switched off.
• You cannot connect more than one
DV camcorder at a time.
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to
just one camcorder.
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder.
Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back
on again.
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV
camcorder.
• The DV camcorder is not set for play- The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to
back. Please select playback mode on
the DV camcorder.
playback mode.
• Searching for a printer. Please wait a This message is displayed when the recorder is
moment. To cancel, press ENTER.
scanning for a connected printer, or when the
printer is not yet ready for printing. If there is no
printer connected, please connect one.
If the message does not disappear, try
disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.
(Note that this recorder may not work correctly
with all printers.)
• The printer is not ready or is not
connected. Please check the printer.
This message is displayed when communication
could not be established with the printer. See the
Troubleshooting section if you do not know the
cause.
• Printing has been canceled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer
error during printing. After checking the printer for
the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer
and start the printing job again, or select "Yes" to
resume printing (select "No" to cancel the print
job). See also the operating instructions that came
with your printer for possible causes of print
errors.
163
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laotian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czech (cs), 0319
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Tatar (tt), 2020
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm),
1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
164
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
17
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is shown in widescreen with
black bars at the top and bottom of the
screen.
The sides of the program are cropped so that
the picture fills the whole screen.
4:3
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is presented correctly on either
setting.
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The program is presented in widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the picture is
presented—check the manual that came
with the TV for details.
165
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
Handling discs
For more detailed care information see the
instructions that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the
recorder.
When holding discs of any type, take care
not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on
the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or
by the center hole and edge.
Damaged discs
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder.
If you can see that a disc is cracked,
chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged,
don't risk using it; you could end up
damaging the recorder.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback
and recording performance. Take care also
not to scratch the label side of the disc.
Although not as fragile as the recorded side,
scratches can still result in a disc becoming
unusable.
This recorder is designed for use with
conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of
shaped discs is not recommended for this
product. Pioneer disclaims all liability
arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
Should a disc become marked with
fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft,
dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the
center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with
a circular motion.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol,
or a commercially available CD/DVD
cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly.
Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning
agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Cleaning the pickup lens
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become
dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it
should malfunction due to dust or dirt,
consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized
service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more
durable than vinyl records, you should still
take care to handle and store discs correctly.
When you're not using a disc, return it to its
case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs
in excessively cold, humid, or hot
environments (including under direct
sunlight).
recommend using them since some may
damage the lens.
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the
disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other
sharp-tipped writing instrument. These
could all damage the disc.
166
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Condensation
17
ꢉ
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover
with cloth—this may prevent proper cooling
of the unit.
Condensation may form inside the recorder
if it is brought into a warm room from
outside, or if the temperature of the room
rises quickly. Although the condensation
won’t damage the recorder, it may
ꢉ
Place on an unstable surface, or one that
is not large enough to support all four of the
unit’s feet.
temporarily impair its performance. For this
reason you should leave it to adjust to the
warmer temperature for about an hour
before switching on and using.
Moving the recorder
If you need to move the recorder, first
remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc
tray. Next, press ꢃ STANDBY/ON to switch
the power to standby, checking that the
POWER OFF indication in the display goes
off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly,
disconnect the power cord. Never lift or
move the unit during playback or
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this unit for
years to come, so please bear in mind the
following points when choosing a suitable
location for it:
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and
may be damaged.
Do...
Resetting the recorder
ꢈ
Use in a well-ventilated room.
ꢈ
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such
as a table, shelf or stereo rack.
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to
all its factory settings.
Don’t...
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.
ꢉ
Use in a place exposed to high
2
Using the front panel controls, press
temperatures or humidity, including near
radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
and hold ꢅ STOP and press ꢃ STANDBY/
ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
ꢉ
Place on a window sill or other place
where the recorder will be exposed to direct
sunlight.
ꢉ
Use in a dusty or damp environment or
in a room where it will be exposed to
excessive cigarette smoke.
ꢉ
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or
other component in your stereo system that
becomes hot in use.
ꢉ
Use near a television or monitor as you
may experience interference—especially if
the television uses an indoor antenna.
ꢉ
Use in a kitchen or other room where the
recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam.
167
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
Specifications
DVR-545HX-S (160 GB)
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 34 h to 455 h
General
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
DVR-940HX-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 W
DVR-545HX-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 W
Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . 0.98 W
(Front panel display: off)
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h
Weight
DVR-940HX-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 kg
DVR-545HX-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 kg
Dimensions
DVR-940HX-S
. . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 81 mm (H) x 318 mm (D)
DVR-545HX-S
. . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 79 mm (H) x 319 mm (D)
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C
Operating humidity . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)
TV system. . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC (external input only)
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m
(DVD-R DL only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m
Readable discs
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW,
DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW
(WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX)
Recording discs and formats
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode
DVD-RAM: VR mode
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R DL: +VR mode
Timer
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs
Clock . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG
Tuner (analog)
Receivable channels
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz
Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD
SECAM B/G
PAL I
Frequency
PAL B/G
Frequency
47 MHz to 89 MHz
Channel
Channel
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
E2 to E4
X to Z
44 MHz to 89 MHz
A to C
X to Z
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12
S1 to S20
104 MHz to 300 MHz
D to J
11, 13
S1 to S20
DVR-940HX-S (500 GB)
M1 to M10
U1 to U10
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 424 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 638 h
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 850 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1064 h
Manual Mode (MN). . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h to 1422 h
Hyper
UHF
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM D/K
SECAM L
Frequency
PAL D/K
Channel
Frequency
49 MHz to 94 MHz
Channel
FB, FC1, FC
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
49 MHz to 65 MHz
R1 to R5
F1 to F6
B to Q
104 MHz to 300 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 to R12
S1 to S20
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Hyper
UHF
300 MHz to 470 MHz
470 MHz to 862 MHz
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
S21 to S41
21 to 69
168
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
17
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
Digital audio output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
Common Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA module
DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Type A (front), Type B (front)
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin
External HDD (DVR-940HX-S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Tuner (digital)
Receiving system . . . . . . . . DVB-T (2 K / 8 K COFDM)
Tuner VHF/UHF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VHF band III (170 MHz to 230 MHz)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz)
Auto Channel Preset. . . . . . . . . . .999 ch, Auto Preset,
Auto Label, Auto Sort
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo MPEG layer I/II
This product’s digital tuner has been confirmed for use
in the following countries: Belgium, France, Germany,
Italy, Spain, Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden,
UK.
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals
for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
Input/Output
Antenna
. . . .75
Ω
IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (analog)
IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital)
. . . . 75
Ω
Video input. . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),
Input 3 (rear)
Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2, Input 3)
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1),
RCA jack (Output)
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),
Input 3 (rear)
PIN no.
AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND
17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in
19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out
20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND
Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, Input 3)
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
Y (luminance) - Output level. . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output)
Component video output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks
RGB input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1)
Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1)
RGB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),
Input 3 (rear) L/R
Supplied accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . .1
G-LINK™ cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 (1.5 m and 30 cm)
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Operating Instructions
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Note: The specifications and design of this product are
subject to change without notice, due to improvement.
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced
by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC Corporation.
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
169
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Additional information
170
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
17
171
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_A_En
Printed in UK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<VRB1456-A>
|